Download Print this page

Keysight X Series User & Programmers Manual

Signal analyzer emi receiver mode

Hide thumbs Also See for X Series:

User & programmers manual (3096 pages)

,

User reference (2852 pages)

,

Programmer's reference manual (2650 pages)

page of 1529

/ 1529
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual

X-Series Signal Analyzers

EMI Receiver Mode

N9000B N9020B N9021B N9030B N9038B N9040B N9041B N9042B N9048B

USER'S & PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Chapters

Table of Contents

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the X Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Keysight X Series

Page 1 X-Series Signal Analyzers EMI Receiver Mode N9000B N9020B N9021B N9030B N9038B N9040B N9041B N9042B N9048B USER'S & PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE...
Page 2 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A to US government customers under its PARTICULAR PURPOSE. KEYSIGHT SHALL Keysight Technologies, Inc. as governed by standard commercial license, which is NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR United States and international copyright...
Page 3 X-Series Signal Analyzers EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference Table Of Contents EMI Receiver ModeUser's & Programmer's Reference Table Of Contents 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.1 Products Covered by this Document 1.2 Additional Documentation 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1 Mode/Meas/View Dialog 2.1.1.1 Mode 2.1.1.2 Application Mode Remote Commands Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only)
Page 4 Table Of Contents 2.3.1 Window Title 2.3.2 Measurement Data 2.3.3 Annotation Hotspot 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4.1 Right-Click Menu 2.4.1.1 Add to User Menu 2.4.1.2 Help on this setting 2.4.2 User Menu 2.5 Cancel key 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key 2.7 Touch On/Off Key 2.8 Tab key 2.9 Local Button 2.10 Control Bar...
Page 5 Table Of Contents 2.18.2 Screen List (Remote only command) 2.19 Fullscreen 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.1 Views 3.1.2 Windows 3.1.3 Amplitude 3.1.3.1 Y Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Y Axis Unit Ref Level Offset Relative Unit (/MHz) 3.1.3.2 Attenuation Atten / Atten (Meters) Atten (Scan)
Page 6 Table Of Contents View Editor Remote Commands View Listing Query User View Listing Query 3.1.5.3 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.1.6 Freq 3.1.6.1 Settings Frequency (Meters) Span Midspan Frequency Start Frequency Stop Frequency Meter Incr Frequency Offset...
Page 7 Table Of Contents Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Minimum Peak 3.1.7.5 Pk Search Config Pk Threshold Pk Excursion Peak Threshold Line Peak Search Mode 3.1.7.6 Marker Function Marker Frequency Measure at Marker Measure Config Meas at Mkr Window Marker Zoom Marker Zoom Out 3.1.7.7 Marker To...
Page 8 Table Of Contents RF Input Port Auto Step Size Rules (Remote Command) Detectors Meas Preset 3.1.8.2 Scan Scan Sequence Scan Type Accelerated TDS (30 MHz-3.2 GHz) Step Control # of Scans (Avg Number) Scan Pause/ Resume Scan Table Signal Zoom Zoom Out 3.1.8.3 Search Pk Threshold On/Off...
Page 9 Table Of Contents Meters à List (Append) Meters Max à Signal (Replace) Meters Max à List (Append) Snap to Meters (Select Closest Signal) Dwell Time Couple Meters to Signal List Couple Meters to Marker Detectors Scan/Spectrum Trace Type Scan/Spectrum Detector Measure/Measure at Marker Detector Meter On /Off Meters Detector...
Page 10 Table Of Contents Edit Limit Select Limit Go To Row Insert Row Below Scale X Axis X Offset Y Offset Apply Offset to Limit Table Delete Row Delete Limit Limit Table Frequency Amplitude Limit Graph Edit Limit Settings Select Limit Test Trace Frequency Interpolation Freq Reference...
Page 11 Table Of Contents LISN Control Settings LISN Control ESH2-Z5 Phase ESH2-Z5 Protective Earth ENV216 Phase ENV216 150 kHz Highpass LISN Control Settings (Measure) LISN Control Phase N On/Off Phase L1 On/Off Phase L2 On/Off Phase L3 On/Off 150 kHz Highpass PE GRO On/Off PE FLO On/Off Mode IDN Response...
Page 12 Table Of Contents Backwards Compatibility SCPI commands Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Block Data Transmission (Remote Command Only) Trace Point Limit (Remote Command Only) Trace Display (Remote Command Only) Detector Type (Remote Command Only) 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 3.2.1 Views 3.2.2 Windows...
Page 13 Table Of Contents User View Listing Query 3.2.5.3 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Control Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.2.6 Freq 3.2.6.1 Settings Frequency Span Last Span CF Step Frequency Offset Meas at CF Meas at CF Window Meas at CF Result ->...
Page 14 Table Of Contents Peak Threshold Line Peak Search Mode 3.2.7.5 Properties Marker Frequency Relative To Marker Trace Marker Settings Diagram 3.2.7.6 Marker To Marker Frequency Mkr->CF 3.2.8 Meas Setup 3.2.8.1 Settings Avg/Hold Num Avg Type Meas Preset 3.2.8.2 Meas Standard EMC Standard EMC Std Preset To 3.2.8.3 Meters...
Page 15 Table Of Contents Couple Measure to Meters Detectors Signal à Meters (Remote Command Only) 3.2.8.4 Signal List Select Signal Mark Signal Mark Duplicates All Mark Duplicates Upper Mark Duplicates Lower Clear Mark Mark All Clear All Marks Sort By Sort Order Delete Signal Delete All Delete Marked...
Page 16 Table Of Contents Freq Reference Amplitude Interpolation Amplitude Reference Copy from Limit Copy Build From Trace Build Description Comment Test Limits Delete All Limits Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only) Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only) Limit Line Upper (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard compatibility) 3.2.8.6 Tune &...
Page 17 Table Of Contents Trace Settings Table 3.2.10.3 Trace Function From Trace To Trace Copy 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.1 Views 3.3.2 Windows 3.3.3 Amplitude 3.3.3.1 Y Scale Ref Value Scale/ Div Y Axis Unit Ref Level Offset Relative Unit (/MHz) 3.3.3.2 Attenuation Atten / Atten (Meters) 3.3.3.3 Signal Path...
Page 18 Table Of Contents Graticule Screen Annotation Control Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.3.6 Freq 3.3.6.1 Settings Frequency Freq Increment Frequency Offset 3.3.7 Marker 3.3.7.1 Select Marker 3.3.7.2 Settings Marker Time Marker Mode Delta Marker (Reset Delta) Marker Settings Diagram All Markers Off Couple Markers Marker Y Axis Value ( Remote Command Only )
Page 19 Table Of Contents Limit Use Limit Line Autorange Auto Preamp Peak Hold Time Adjustable Peak Hold Time Dwell Time Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only) All Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only) Current Power (Remote Query Only) Peak Power (Remote Query Only) Reset Peak Hold Reset Peak Hold On Freq Change Meters Max à...
Page 20 Table Of Contents 3.3.8.3 Meas Standard EMC Standard EMC Std Preset To 3.3.8.4 Tune & Listen Demod Type FM Demod De-Emphasis 3.3.8.5 Advanced Noise Floor Extension Autorange Atten 10 dB Minimum LISN Control Settings LISN Control ESH2-Z5 Phase ESH2-Z5 Protective Earth ENV216 Phase ENV216 150 kHz Highpass Mode IDN Response...
Page 21 Table Of Contents Y Axis Unit Relative Unit (/MHz) Autorange Auto Preamp 3.4.3.2 Attenuation Atten / Atten (Meters) 3.4.3.3 Signal Path µW Presel Center µW Presel Adjust Internal Preamp / Internal Preamp (Meters) LNA / LNA (Meters) 3.4.4 BW 3.4.4.1 Settings Res BW 3.4.5 Display 3.4.5.1 View...
Page 22 Table Of Contents Marker Amplitude Marker Mode Delta Marker (Reset Delta) Marker Settings Diagram All Markers Off Couple Markers 3.4.7.3 Peak Search Marker Amplitude Peak Search 3.4.7.4 Properties Marker Amplitude Relative To Marker Trace Marker Settings Diagram 3.4.7.5 Marker To Marker Amplitude Marker ->...
Page 23 Table Of Contents Final Measurement (Remote Command Only) Search Method (Remote Command Only) No of Peaks (Remote Command Only) Insert Signal (Remote Command Only) Clear All Signals (Remote Command Only) 3.4.8.3 Limits Edit Limit Go To Row Insert Row Below Delete Row Clear Table APD Method...
Page 24 Table Of Contents Global Limit Lines (Freq and Amptd) Restore Defaults 3.4.9 Sweep 3.4.9.1 Sweep/Control Sweep/Measure Restart Pause/Resume Start Measure/ Stop Measure Abort (Remote Command Only) 3.4.10 Trace 3.4.10.1 Trace Control Select Trace View/Blank Reset Exceeded Limit Trace Update State (Remote Command Only) Trace Display State (Remote Command Only) Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN)
Page 25 Table Of Contents Delete All User Views View Editor Remote Commands View Listing Query User View Listing Query 3.5.5.3 Annotation Graticule Screen Annotation Trace Annotation Control Annotation Meas Bar Display Enable (Remote Command Only) 3.5.6 Freq 3.5.6.1 Select Channel 3.5.6.2 Settings Frequency Manual Frequency Setup Table...
Page 26 Table Of Contents Marker Time MkrD->Span 3.5.8 Meas Setup 3.5.8.1 Settings Pause Start Start Analysis Search Disturbance Setup Table General Attenuation Full Range Atten Terminal Duration, Hours Duration, Minutes Duration, Seconds Click Count Factor f Meas Standard Channel Setup Frequency Manual Frequency Limit Click Rate...
Page 27 Table Of Contents LISN Control ESH2-Z5 Phase ESH2-Z5 Protective Earth ENV216 Phase ENV216 150 kHz Highpass Mode IDN Response 3.5.8.5 Global Global Center Freq Global EMC Std Global Limit Lines (Freq and Amptd) Restore Defaults 3.5.9 Sweep 3.5.9.1 Sweep Control Pause / Resume Stop / Start Search Disturbance...
Page 28 Table Of Contents 3.6.3.3 Signal Path µW Presel Center µW Presel Adjust Internal Preamp / Internal Preamp (Meters) LNA / LNA (Meters) 3.6.4 BW 3.6.4.1 Settings Res BW 3.6.5 Display 3.6.5.1 Meas Display Display Trace Start Time Couple Marker to Display Trace Time Domain Freq Time Domain Freq Line Waterfall Trace...
Page 29 Table Of Contents Start Frequency Stop Frequency CF Step Frequency Offset Previous Segment Next Segment Full Segment 3.6.7 Marker 3.6.7.1 Select Marker 3.6.7.2 Settings Marker Frequency Marker Y Axis Value (Remote Command Only) Marker Z Time (Remote Query Only) Marker Z Marker Mode Delta Marker (Reset Delta) Marker Table...
Page 30 Table Of Contents Meas Preset 3.6.8.2 Limits Limits Table Enabled Margin Trace Description Edit Limit Select Limit Go To Row Insert Row Below Scale X Axis X Offset Y Offset Apply Offset to Limit Table Delete Row Delete Limit Limit Table Frequency Amplitude Limit Graph...
Page 31 Table Of Contents 3.6.8.4 Advanced Noise Floor Extension Query Acquisition Boundaries (Remote Command Only) Query Bypass Path Acquisition Boundaries (Remote Command Only) 3.6.8.5 Global Global Center Freq Global EMC Std Global Limit Lines (Freq and Amptd) Restore Defaults 3.6.9 Sweep 3.6.9.1 Sweep/Control Sweep/Measure Restart...
Page 32 Table Of Contents 4.1.2 Show Hardware 4.1.3 Show LXI 4.1.4 Show Support Subscriptions 4.1.5 Show Support ID 4.1.6 Control Panel… 4.1.7 Web Browser 4.1.8 Application Controls 4.1.9 Sounds 4.2 I/O Config 4.2.1 GPIB 4.2.1.1 GPIB Address 4.2.1.2 GPIB Controller 4.2.2 SCPI LAN 4.2.2.1 SCPI Telnet 4.2.2.2 SCPI Socket 4.2.2.3 SICL Server...
Page 33: Table Of Contents
Table Of Contents 4.2.6 Restore I/O Config Defaults 4.2.7 Query USB Connection (Remote Query Only) 4.2.8 USB Connection Status (Remote Query Only) 4.2.9 USB Packet Count (Remote Query Only) 4.2.10 Lock Remote I/O Session (Remote Command only) 4.2.10.1 Lock Remote I/O Request (Remote Query only) 4.2.10.2 Unlock Remote I/O Session (Remote Command only) 4.2.10.3 Remote I/O Session Lock Name (Remote Query only) 4.2.10.4 Remote I/O Session Lock Owner (Remote Query only)
Page 34 Table Of Contents 4.3.7.10 Control Size 4.3.7.11 Quick Save Mode 4.3.7.12 Screen Tabs Left/Right 4.3.7.13 Hide Screen Tabs in Full Screen 4.3.7.14 2-Screen Orientation 4.3.7.15 Clock Format 4.3.7.16 Language 4.3.7.17 Restore User Interface Defaults 4.3.7.18 User Interface Type (Remote Query Only) 4.4 Power On 4.4.1 Power On State 4.4.2 Power On Application...
Page 35 Table Of Contents 4.6.1 Auto Align 4.6.1.1 Auto Align 4.6.1.2 All but RF 4.6.1.3 Alert 4.6.2 Align Now 4.6.2.1 Align Now All 4.6.2.2 Align Now All but RF 4.6.2.3 Align Now RF 4.6.2.4 Align Now Expired 4.6.2.5 Align Now Preselector 4.6.2.6 Align Now All but RF Preselector 4.6.2.7 Align Now RF Presel Only (20 Hz to 3.6 GHz) 4.6.2.8 Align Now External Mixer...
Page 36 Table Of Contents 4.6.4 Show Alignment Statistics 4.6.5 Timebase DAC 4.6.5.1 Timebase DAC 4.6.5.2 User Value 4.6.6 Advanced 4.6.6.1 Characterize Preselector 4.6.6.2 Characterize Reference Clock 4.6.6.3 Characterize Noise Floor 4.6.6.4 Calibration Temperature History 4.6.6.5 TDS Alignment 4.6.6.6 Backup or Restore Align Data… Alignment Data Wizard (without Flash) Perform Backup (without Flash) (Remote Command Only) Perform Restore (without Flash) (Remote Command Only)
Page 37 Table Of Contents 4.7.4.3 License Checked Out Query (Remote Query Only) 4.7.4.4 List Licenses Checked Out (Remote Query Only) 4.7.4.5 Borrowed Network Licenses 4.7.4.6 Borrow a License 4.7.4.7 Listing Borrowed Licenses and Return a Borrowed License List Borrowed Licenses (Remote Query Only) Return a Borrowed License (Remote Command Only) 4.7.4.8 Enabling Network Checkouts While Borrowed 4.7.5 USB Portable Licenses...
Page 38 Table Of Contents 4.11.8 SCPI Version Query (Remote Query Only) 4.11.9 Date (Remote Command Only) 4.11.10 Time (Remote Command Only) 4.11.11 Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only) 4.11.12 Power Up (Remote Query Only) 5 Preset 5.1 Preset Dropdown 5.2 Mode Preset 5.3 Restore Mode Defaults 5.4 Input/Output Preset 5.5 Full Mode Preset...
Page 39 Table Of Contents 6.1.6.3 Power Ref 6.1.6.4 Power Unit 6.1.6.5 Amptd Offset 6.1.6.6 Amplitude Increment 6.1.7 Frequency 6.1.8 List Sequencer 6.1.8.1 Sequencer 6.1.8.2 Initiate Sequence 6.1.8.3 Repetition 6.1.8.4 Trig Out Type 6.1.8.5 Select Data Marker 6.1.8.6 Manual Trigger Now 6.1.8.7 List Sequencer Setup Number of Steps Go To Step Insert Step Before...
Page 40 Table Of Contents Clear List (Remote Command Only) 6.1.8.8 Remote Software Trigger (Remote command Only) 6.1.8.9 Query List Sequence Initiation Armed Status (Remote Query Only) 6.1.9 Frequency Setup 6.1.9.1 Frequency 6.1.9.2 Channel 6.1.9.3 Radio Setup Radio Standard/Radio Band Radio Band Link 6.1.9.4 Set Reference Frequency 6.1.9.5 Freq Reference 6.1.9.6 Freq Offset...
Page 41 Table Of Contents Baseband Freq Offs Baseband Power 1000 Mkr 1-4 Polarity 1000 Pulse/RF Blank 1000 ALC Hold 1001 Trigger Type 1002 Continuous trigger 1002 Single trigger 1003 Segment Advance trigger 1004 Trigger Source 1004 Bus Trigger Command (Remote Command Only) 1005 Sync to Trigger Source 1005...
Page 42 Table Of Contents Edit Selected Sequence 1024 Segment 1024 Waveform 1024 Repetitions 1024 Marker 1 – Marker 4 1024 Sync Seq File 1025 Insert Waveform 1025 Segments in ARB Memory 1026 Delete Segment From ARB Mem 1026 Delete All From ARB Memory 1026 Delete Segment 1026...
Page 43 Table Of Contents 6.1.13.6 Sync Connected (Remote Query Only) 1041 6.1.14 Source Preset 1041 6.2 Input 1042 6.2.1 Select Input 1042 6.2.2 RF Input Port 1051 6.2.3 SA Frequency Extender Firmware Update (Front Panel Only) 1061 6.2.4 SA Frequency Extender Cable Correction 1062 6.2.5 Half Duplex Input Port 1062...
Page 44 Table Of Contents Differential 1089 Input Z 1090 Skew 1091 Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only) 1092 6.2.21.2 I Probe 1092 Attenuation 1093 Offset 1094 Coupling 1094 Clear Calibration 1095 6.2.21.3 Calibrate 1095 I/Q Isolation Calibration 1096 I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) 1097 I Port 1097...
Page 45 Table Of Contents 6.2.27 Audio In Impedance 1109 6.2.28 Input/Output Preset 1109 6.3 External Gain 1111 6.3.1 External Preamp 1111 6.3.2 External Gain - MS 1113 6.3.3 External Gain - BTS 1114 6.3.4 I Ext Gain 1115 6.3.5 Q Ext Gain 1116 6.3.6 Q Gain in I+jQ 1116...
Page 46 Table Of Contents 6.5.7 Complex Corrections 1142 6.5.7.1 Go To Row (Select Correction) 1143 6.5.7.2 Delete Row 1143 6.5.7.3 Delete All 1143 6.5.7.4 Correction On 1144 6.5.7.5 Correction Port 1144 6.5.7.6 Direction 1145 6.5.7.7 Description 1146 6.5.7.8 Comment 1146 6.5.7.9 File 1147 6.5.7.10 Freq Interpolation (Remote Command Only) 1147...
Page 47 Table Of Contents 6.6 Freq Ref Input 1159 6.6.1 Freq Ref Input 1159 6.6.2 Ext Ref Freq 1164 6.6.3 Default External Ref Freq 1165 6.6.4 LO Ref Input 1165 6.6.5 Ref Lock BW 1166 6.6.6 Reference Oscillator On/Off (Remote Command Only) 1167 6.6.6.1 Select Ref 1167...
Page 48 Table Of Contents 6.8.9 Select Analyzer PXI Line 1191 6.8.10 Source Internal Trig Out 1191 6.8.11 Source Internal Trig Out Polarity 1192 6.9 Calibration 1194 6.9.1 Configuration 1194 6.9.1.1 Cal Group 1196 6.9.1.2 Calibrate Checked Rows 1196 6.9.1.3 Apply Cal Group 1197 6.9.1.4 Abort Calibration 1197...
Page 49 Table Of Contents 6.9.1.27 Start Freq 1207 6.9.1.28 Stop Freq 1208 6.9.1.29 Freq Step 1209 6.9.1.30 Freq Points 1209 6.9.1.31 Mech Atten Type 1210 6.9.1.32 Mech Atten Start 1210 6.9.1.33 Mech Atten Stop 1211 6.9.1.34 Mech Atten Step 1212 6.9.1.35 Elec Atten Type 1212 6.9.1.36 Elec Atten Start 1212...
Page 50 Table Of Contents 6.10 Calibrator Control 1231 6.10.1 Select Cal Source 1231 6.10.2 Cal Output 1231 6.10.3 Cal Frequency 1232 6.10.4 Cal Signal Type 1232 6.10.5 Cal Comb Spacing 1232 6.10.6 Calibrator Reference 1233 6.11 Advanced 1234 6.11.1 T/R Port High Power Attenuator 1234 6.12 Aux I/O Control 1236...
Page 51 Table Of Contents 7.2.6 Limit 1252 7.2.6.1 Select Limit 1253 7.2.6.2 Default Directory 1253 7.2.7 Correction 1254 7.2.7.1 Select Correction 1255 7.2.7.2 Default Directory 1255 7.2.8 Complex Correction 1255 7.2.8.1 Select Complex Correction 1256 7.2.9 Correction Group 1256 7.2.10 Recall VDI CCD Correction 1257 7.2.11 Mask 1257...
Page 52 Table Of Contents 7.3.5.1 Save From 1276 7.3.5.2 Data Type 1276 Trace 1277 Spectrogram 1281 Meas Results 1286 Frequency Scan Signal List 1288 Frequency Scan Table 1288 Disturbance Analyzer Trace 1290 Disturbance List 1290 APD Trace 1291 APD Signal List 1293 7.3.6 Measurement Report 1293...
Page 53 Table Of Contents 7.3.10 Mask 1306 7.3.11 Waveform Sequence 1306 7.3.12 Screen Image 1306 7.3.12.1 Theme 1308 7.3.13 Power Sensor Cal Factor 1309 7.3.14 Remote Only Commands 1310 7.3.14.1 Mass Storage Catalog (Remote Command Only) 1310 7.3.14.2 Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only) 1310 7.3.14.3 Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only) 1310...
Page 54 Table Of Contents 8.1.1.6 External 2 1335 8.1.1.7 External 3 1336 8.1.1.8 Audio External 1337 8.1.1.9 RF Burst 1337 8.1.1.10 Periodic 1338 8.1.1.11 I/Q Mag 1340 8.1.1.12 Input I 1340 8.1.1.13 Input Q 1341 8.1.1.14 I (Demodulated) 1341 8.1.1.15 Q (Demodulated) 1342 8.1.1.16 Aux I/Q Mag 1342...
Page 55 Table Of Contents 8.1.19 Select PXI Line 1362 8.1.20 Reset Sync Monitor 1363 8.1.21 Trigger Optimization 1364 8.1.22 Trigger Settings Diagram 1365 8.2 Gate Source 1366 8.2.1 Select Gate Source 1366 8.2.2 Sync Holdoff 1367 8.3 Gate Settings 1369 8.3.1 Gate On/Off 1369 8.3.2 Gate View On/Off 1370...
Page 56 Table Of Contents 1389 1390 1399 1401 1401 1401 1403 1403 1404 1405 1405 1418 1420 9.2 IEEE 488.2 Common Commands 1421 9.2.1 *CAL? - Calibration Query 1421 9.2.2 *CLS - Clear Status 1422 9.2.3 *ESE - Standard Event Status Enable 1422 9.2.4 *ESR? - Standard Event Status Register Query 1423...
Page 57 Table Of Contents 9.3.2.2 INITiate 1431 9.3.2.3 FETCh 1431 9.3.2.4 READ 1432 9.3.2.5 MEASure 1433 9.3.3 Trace Formatting Commands 1434 9.3.3.1 Clear Trace (Remote Command Only) 1434 9.3.3.2 Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) 1435 9.3.3.3 Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only) 1437 9.3.3.4 Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only) 1438...
Page 58 Table Of Contents Operation Positive Transition 1467 9.4.6.4 Operation Instrument Register 1468 Operation Instrument Condition 1468 Operation Instrument Enable 1469 Operation Instrument Event Query 1469 Operation Instrument Negative Transition 1470 Operation Instrument Positive Transition 1470 9.4.6.5 Questionable Register 1471 Questionable Condition 1472 Questionable Enable 1472...
Page 59 Table Of Contents Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable 1491 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query 1492 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition 1492 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition 1493 9.4.6.12 Questionable Calibration Skipped Register 1493 Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition 1494 Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable 1495...
Page 60 Table Of Contents 10.2.5 Do Noise Correction 1513 10.2.6 Do Spur Suppression 1513 10.2.7 Electronic Attenuator Bypass 1514 10.2.8 Electronic Attenuation 1514 10.2.9 External Reference Frequency 1514 10.2.10 Frequency Reference Source 1515 10.2.11 IF Gain 1515 10.2.12 IF Type 1515 10.2.13 Include Power Spectrum 1515 10.2.14 Mechanical Attenuation...
Page 61 Table Of Contents 10.9 Diagnostic Binary Read Fast Power Measurement (Remote Command Only) 1528 EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 62 X-Series Signal Analyzers EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 1 Documentation Roadmap This section describes the Keysight products covered by this document, and provides links to related documentation. – "Products Covered by this Document" on page 63 – "Additional Documentation" on page 64...
Page 63 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.1 Products Covered by this Document 1.1 Products Covered by this Document For the full list of instrument models covered by this documentation, see the title page: "EMI Receiver ModeUser's & Programmer's Reference" on page EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 64 – Users & Programmers Reference, in downloadable PDF format For information on this Mode, download from: http://literature.cdn.keysight.com/litweb/pdf/N6141-90004.pdf The following documents are available online at keysight.com: X-Series Messages Guide The following documents are in downloadable PDF format: Getting Started Guides, Instrument Messages & Security –...
Page 65 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.2 Additional Documentation – N9041B UXA Specifications Guide Measurement Guides – Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measurement Guide – Real-Time Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Guide – Noise Figure Measurement Guide – Analog Demod Measurement Application Measurement Guide – Phase Noise Measurement Application Measurement Guide –...
Page 66 X-Series Signal Analyzers EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 2 User Interface Here are the basic elements of the Multitouch User Interface. For more information, tap a topic. Included in this section are also topics for several front panel keys not described in other topics.
Page 67 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1 Screen Tabs In the X-Series Multitouch User Interface (or Multitouch UI), you can run many different Measurement Applications, or “Modes”. Examples are Spectrum Analyzer Mode, LTE-A FDD Mode, IQ Analyzer Mode, and Real Time Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Page 68 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs The following topics provide more information: – "Mode/Meas/View Dialog" on page 68 – "Add Screen" on page 85 – "Multiscreen" on page 155 2.1.1 Mode/Meas/View Dialog The Mode/Meas/View dialog opens when you press the selected (blue) Screen tab (see "Screen Tabs"...
Page 69 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1.1 Mode The first column in the Mode/Meas/View dialog allows you to select the desired Mode from those currently licensed in your instrument. Modes, also known as “measurement applications”, are collections of measurement capabilities packaged together to provide you with an instrument personality specific to your measurement needs.
Page 70 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :INSTrument:SELect CONFigure commands separately. See "Mode and Measurement Select" on page :INSTrument[:SELect] <mode_id> Remote Command where <mode_id> is one of the values listed in "Index to Modes" on page 71 below :INSTrument[:SELect]? :INST SA Example :INST:CAT? Notes...
Page 71 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :CONF commands Index to Modes The Mode Number in the table below is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument:NSELect command. The Mode Parameter is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument[:SELect] command. Your actual choices will depend upon which applications are installed in your instrument.
Page 72 Each application (Mode) that runs in an X-Series instrument consumes virtual memory. The various applications consume varying amounts of virtual memory, and as more applications run, the memory consumption increases. Keysight characterizes each Mode and assigns a memory usage quantity based on a conservative estimate.
Page 73 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :INST:CAT? Example Notes Query returns a quoted string of the installed and licensed modes separated with a comma. Example: "SA,PNOISE,WCDMA" :INSTrument:CATalog? INSTrument:SELECT Backwards VSA (E4406A): returned a list of installed items Compatibility as a comma separated list of string values, for example: Notes "BASIC","GSM","EDGEGSM","CDMA","SERVICE"...
Page 74 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Current Application Options (Remote Command Only) Returns a string that is the Options list of the currently selected application (Mode). This information is also displayed in the Show System screen :SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:OPTion? Remote Command :SYST:APPL:OPT? Example Notes Query returns a quoted string that is the Option list of the currently selected application (Mode).
Page 75 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Application Catalog Revision (Remote Command Only) Returns the Revision of the provided Model Number. :SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:REVision? <model> Remote Command :SYST:APPL:CAT:REV? ‘N9060A’ Example Notes Returned value is a quoted string of revision for the provided Model Number. The revision will be a null- string ("") if the provided Model Number is not installed, licensed, and loaded.
Page 76 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs GSM Mode compatibility command (Remote Command only) Provided for backwards compatibility. When this command is received, the analyzer aliases it to the following: :INST:SEL EDGEGSM :INSTrument[:SELect] GSM Remote Command :INST GSM Example SA compatibility command for EMC (Remote Command only) Provided for ESU compatibility.
Page 77 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs This results in the analyzer being placed in the EMI Receiver Mode, running the APD measurement, in order to emulate the ESU APD Mode. :INSTrument[:SELect] APDistribution Remote Command :INST APD Example IF Mode compatibility command for EMC (Remote Command only) Provided for ESU compatibility.
Page 78 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 79 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1.5 Sequencer Allows multiple Screens to update sequentially while in "Multiscreen" on page 155 display mode. Each Screen updates in sequence, and when all have updated, the sequence will start again. To start the Sequencer, you must have more than one Screen defined, and you must have Multiscreen selected (see "Screen Tabs"...
Page 80 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs In the Sequencer block in the upper left hand corner, tap the Sequencing switch to turn it On: EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 81 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs The instrument will immediately exit the Mode/Meas/View Dialog and begin making measurements in each of the screens, one after the other. When a measurement is being made in a particular Screen, that Screen’s tab will be blue. Measurement being made in Screen 1: Measurement being made in Screen 2: EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 82 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Touching any key or control on the display will cause the Sequencer to stop, so that you can make desired changes. When this happens, the message “Sequencer stopped” is displayed. When the Sequencer is running, the screens update in the order in which they were created.
Page 83 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs To reset the name, delete the screen name entirely. Each Screen Name must be unique; you cannot give the same name to more than one screen. :INSTrument:SCReen:REName <alphanumeric> Remote Command :INST:SCR:REN “Baseband” Example Notes The currently active screen is renamed.
Page 84 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs “This function will delete all defined screens and their settings, except for the current screen. This action cannot be undone. Do you want to proceed?” Pressing OK or Enter deletes the screen, pressing Cancel or ESC does not. :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Remote Command...
Page 85 2.1 Screen Tabs functions – Easy-to-use Microsoft Windows graphical user interface For more information see the Keysight 89600 Series VSA web site at www.keysight.com/find/89600vsa To learn more about how to use the 89600 VSA in the instrument, start the 89600 VSA software, then open the 89600 VSA Help and navigate to the topic "About...
Page 86 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs If the display is disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict; Screen SCPI cannot be used when Display is disabled” appears EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 87 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar 2.2 Meas Bar The Meas Bar is used to display annotation for the current measurement. There are three primary uses for the Meas Bar: 1. To show annotation for the most important parameters in the measurement so you can see them at a glance 2.
Page 88 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar Settings that are colored amber are those that you need to be particularly aware of; for example, if Alignments are off, this is shown in amber, so you will know that you may not be meeting spec. Similarly, if DC coupling is on, this is shown amber, to alert you to be careful what voltage you put on the input.
Page 89 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar LXI indicator This indicator displays in green when LAN is connected, in white when LAN is not connected, and in red when LAN is connected but has a connection problem. PASS/FAIL indicator This annunciator displays when Limits are turned on. It is green if all Limits are passing, and a red FAIL if any limit is not passing.
Page 90 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar In the example above, trace 1 is active, visible, and in Average using the Sample detector, the other traces are inactive, blanked and in Clear/Write using the Normal detector. Tapping this panel drops down controls for the Traces. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 91 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display 2.3 Measurement Display The Measurement Display contains one or more data windows displaying the result of the current measurement. These may be graphical or textual windows. Each window in the Measurement display contains a "Window Title"...
Page 92 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Measurements that support User Views (see "View Editor" on page 134) also display the Window Number in the Window Title, to enable window addressing from SCPI. The number is the number that will be used in the SCPI command to address that window, for example, in the WCDMA Mod Accuracy measurement, Code Domain Power is assigned window number 6, so you address it with the following SCPI command:...
Page 93 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Note also that the Window Data dropdown can be a cascaded list, if the number of available results requires categorization to hold them all: EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 94 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Note also that the Window Data dropdown sometimes includes controls for further configuring the window, for example, in LTE choosing the desired Component Carrier and Data format. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 95 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Touching a window’s title dropdown also selects the window. 2.3.2 Measurement Data The Measurement Data region shows graphical or textual data for the Data selected in the Window Title Data control. Below you can see examples of both graphical and textual windows in a four-window display.
Page 96 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Swipe There are several swipe actions, as listed below. One of the most important actions is swiping a spectrum window to the left or right, or up or down, to adjust the frequency and level of the spectrum, as shown below. Swipe actions are summarized in the table below.
Page 97 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Object Action Toggle control Toggle in that direction Pinch You can also pinch in or out either horizontally or vertically to zoom in the x-axis or y-axis dimension. For example, a pinch horizontally lets you adjust the Span of the Spectrum window.
Page 98 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Right Click on Lets you select Help the Background Right Click on a Lets you add or remove that control from the User Menu or get Help on that Menu Panel control control Tapping an object causes the actions defined in the table below: Object Action Marker...
Page 99 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Touching anywhere off the hotspot panel or pressing any hardkey except Save or Quick Save closes the hotspot panel. Annotation which is not currently able to be adjusted is not grayed out on the display, but the control in the hotspot that drops down or pops up is grayed out.
Page 100 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4 Menu Panel The menu panel is the main focus of the X-Series Multitouch user interface. The controls include active functions, dropdowns, action buttons, radio buttons and toggles. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 101 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 102 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel The menu panel normally appears on the right side of the display and consists of a rectangular panel with multiple “sub-panels” lying on top of each other, each sub- panel being accessed by a tab on the right. You press a front panel key (or “hardkey”) to access a particular menu.
Page 103 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 104 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel If you move to a different menu panel or sub-panel and then come back to a previous panel, the previous panel is always reset to be scrolled all the way back to the top. Accessing Menus Without Using Front-Panel Keys You can access the menu panels without using the front panel keys, as you would need to do if you were operating the instrument using Remote Desktop.
Page 105 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel for example 13.255 GHz, as in the example below: An active function is “active” if the numeric value is surrounded by a black background with a blue border, as below. In this state, it is ready to receive numeric input from the number pad on the front panel, the knob, or the step keys.
Page 106 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel This causes the Numeric Entry Panel to pop up to receive the numbers you are typing: Type in as many digits as required, then touch one of the unit terminator buttons in the Numeric Entry Panel to complete the entry. In this case, 2 GHz was the desired entry, so you just touch the “GHz”...
Page 107 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel The Numeric Entry Panel disappears and, in the example, the active function value becomes 2 GHz. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 108 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel It is important to note that you can always pop up the Numeric Entry Panel by touching an active function control while it is active; for example, if you were to touch it in the figure above, the Numeric Entry Panel would pop up right next to the control: EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 109 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 110 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel You can display the Numeric Entry Panel by touching any active function control while it is active, but you don’t have to pop up the Numeric Entry Panel first, you can just start typing and it will pop up on its own, thus saving you a keystroke. You can also adjust a value without displaying the Numeric Entry panel by turning the knob or using the step keys while an active function is active.
Page 111 2 User Interface 2.5 Cancel key 2.5 Cancel key This front-panel key has the same functions as the Windows Esc (Escape) key. It does the following: – Cancels dialogs – Cancels active functions (unless there is an entry in progress, in which case it cancels that, and reverts to the previous value) –...
Page 112 2 User Interface 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key This key turns the onscreen alpha keyboard (OSK) on and off. There are two onscreen keyboards: – The Multitouch OSK, which pops up automatically if, while using the analyzer application, a text field becomes the active function –...
Page 113 2 User Interface 2.7 Touch On/Off Key 2.7 Touch On/Off Key This front-panel key turns the display touch functionality on and off. If off, you can turn it back on using the front panel Touch On/Off key. When the touch functionality is off, you can still use a mouse as a pointer.
Page 114 2 User Interface 2.8 Tab key 2.8 Tab key This key has the same function as the Tab key on a PC keyboard. You can use this key to display the Windows Taskbar, as follows. – Alt-Tab to the Desktop –...
Page 115 2 User Interface 2.9 Local Button 2.9 Local Button Appears in the Menu Panel when the instrument is in remote, and can be brought back to local via the Local (ESC) Key. See also "Cancel key" on page 111. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 116 2 User Interface 2.10 Control Bar 2.10 Control Bar The Control Bar contains controls and readouts that let you control instrument functions independent of the current measurement. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 117 2 User Interface 2.11 Windows 2.11 Windows Pressing the Windows icon on the "Control Bar" on page 116 has the same effect as pressing the Windows icon on the Windows taskbar. It displays the Windows taskbar and Start Menu, which allows you to launch Windows programs and access features such as the Control Panel.
Page 118 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo 2.12 Undo/Redo The Undo button in the "Control Bar" on page 116, and the Undo front panel key, are used to undo the most recently executed function. If you Undo a function, and then decide you should not have done so, you can use the Redo button in the "Control Bar"...
Page 119 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo UNDO stack REDO stack Det = Peak RBW = 1MHz CF = 1 GHz When you press Undo, the top item on the Undo stack is removed, the action represented by that item is undone, and the item is placed on the Redo stack. So pressing Undo once in the above case would undo the setting of the peak detector, and the stacks would look like this: UNDO stack...
Page 120 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo For example, in the example above, if you now were to change another setting, such as VBW = 1 kHz, the Redo stack gets cleared, and the stacks would look like this: UNDO stack REDO stack VBW = 1 kHz RBW = 1MHz CF = 1 GHz...
Page 121 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo When you press the Redo icon or Ctl and the Undo hardkey, you are notified with an advisory popup message; for example, if the Center Frequency had been 300 MHz, and you changed it to 1 GHz and then pressed Undo, the message would say: UNDO: Center Freq 1 GHz ->...
Page 122 2 User Interface 2.13 File Functions 2.13 File Functions The File Functions popup contains controls for executing Save, Recall, File and Print operations. You display the File Functions popup by tapping the File Functions icon in the "Control Bar" on page 116.
Page 123 2 User Interface 2.14 Help 2.14 Help Pressing the Help button in the "Control Bar" on page 116, the Help front panel key, or the F1 key if you have a PC keyboard connected, opens the context-sensitive help system. The Help button appears in the "Control Bar"...
Page 124 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar 2.15 Status Bar The Status Panel (or Status Bar) appears at the bottom of the display and contains three fields: The Message Balloon appears on the left side of the Status Panel and lets you know when there is an unread message in the queue.
Page 125 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The triangle is unfilled if no there are no open conditions, filled with yellow if all open conditions are warnings, and filled with red if at least one open condition is an error. The number displayed is the total number of open conditions. Touching the Condition Indicator opens up the Show Status dialog (see below) with the Current Conditions tab selected.
Page 126 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar If the display fills up, scrolling is enabled just as in other X-Series Multi-touch UI displays. The Status dialog automatically refreshes as new messages and conditions occur. At the bottom of the screen is a Clear Message Queue button. This button clears all errors in all error queues.
Page 127 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar <Error Number>,<Error> Where <Error Number> <Error> are those shown on the Show Errors screen Backwards In some legacy analyzers, the Repeat field shows the number of times the message has repeated since Compatibility the last time the error queue was cleared. In the X-Series, the Repeat field shows the number of times Notes the error has repeated since the last intervening error.
Page 128 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The fields on the History display are: Type Displays the icon identifying the event or condition as an error or warning Displays the error number Message Displays the message text Repeat (RPT) This field shows the number of consecutive instances of the event, uninterrupted by other events.
Page 129 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar peak found” – A condition is an occurrence of finite duration, that is, it has a start and an end. Conditions are states of the analyzer characterized by some combination of settings or some kind of failure that the user needs to be told about while it is happening, but then can stop being told once it goes away;...
Page 130 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The fields on the Current Conditions display are: Type Displays the icon identifying the event or condition as an error or warning or informational Displays the error number Message Displays the message text Time Shows the most recent time (including the date) at which the event occurred.
Page 131 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 132 2 User Interface 2.16 Block Diagram 2.16 Block Diagram When you press the Block Diagram button in the "Control Bar" on page 116, the display changes to a stylized pictorial representation of the current internal hardware setup and signal processing path. When you touch one of the blocks on the Block Diagram, the corresponding menu panel opens.
Page 133 2 User Interface 2.16 Block Diagram And here is the Block Diagram when the I/Q inputs are selected: EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 134 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 2.17 View Editor This section describes the use of the View Editor, which allows you to: – Add windows to and delete windows from the current measurement – Resize and rearrange windows – Create User Views User Views are custom Views that you create by adding, deleting, rearranging, resizing, or changing the contents of the windows in an existing View, and then saving the edited View as a new View.
Page 135 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 136 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 137 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor You can save an edited View using the Save Layout as New View control in the View menu (see "To Save a User View" on page 148). On occasion, the instrument may automatically save an edited View for you. If you have edited a View, so that the * is displaying next to the View name, you must save that View as a User View before you save State or switch measurements.
Page 138 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor To Close the View Editor Tap the View Editor button again. The user chooses the desired View through the use of the Mode/Meas/View dialog (see "Mode/Meas/View Dialog" on page 68) or the View menu (a tab under the Display key).
Page 139 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you do this, you get the View Editor screen, which appears as below. The menu panel switches to the View menu. Here we see that we are in the Predefined View called “Basic”. Each window has two arrows containing + signs.
Page 140 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor A fifth window has been added, and is automatically assigned the number 5. (The window number, which is displayed in the Window Title region, is used when sending SCPI commands to that window). Note the * that now appears next to Basic in the View menu, indicating that you are now in the modified Basic View.
Page 141 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor A panel drops down, containing a Data control for specifying window results. Some measurements, such as LTE-A in this example, also provide controls on this dropdown for specifying other window parameters, such as the Component Carrier and Data Format, Tap the Data control and you will see a list of available results for the window.
Page 142 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Choose the result you want and tap OK. Here we have chosen IQ Meas Time from the Demod group: Your new, edited User View is now ready to use. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 143 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 2.17.2 To Resize or Rearrange Windows in a View Sometimes you may wish to resize a window. To do this go back into the View Editor and note the large, translucent white circles along the edges of the draggable borders.
Page 144 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor The outline of the window appears as it is being dragged. When you start to drag a window, target symbols appear in the other windows: If you drop a window on one of the targets, it swaps positions with the target window.
Page 145 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you hover over one of the stripes it gets dimmer, to show the position the window being dragged will take on. If you release a window over an inner stripe, the window you are dragging and the window over which you were hovering resize to share the space the target window originally occupied.
Page 146 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor In either case, one or more of the remaining windows resize to occupy the space formerly occupied by the window you were dragging. 2.17.3 To Delete a Window from a View The View Editor also lets you delete a window. To do this, tap one of the circled red X’s, as shown below.
Page 147 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Now press the View Editor button (the blue hand) to exit the View Editor. At this point, you have an edited Predefined View, as shown by the * next to Basic: When you are finished with it, you can restore the Layout to the default for Basic by pressing “Restore Layout to Default”.
Page 148 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor View” (if you exit the measurement without saving the edited View, the instrument will save it for you as a User View called “Autosaved”). If you clone the current Screen by pressing the “+” tab, the modified Predefined View will be saved as a User View called “Autosaved”, and it will be available in the new Screen.
Page 149 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Notice the User View region which has appeared on the menu panel above, with the new User View called “My New View. Notice also that “Basic” has returned to its original, unedited state and the * is gone from its name. Note also that “Restore Layout to Default”...
Page 150 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When naming a new View, you must choose a name that is not already in use for any User View in any measurement; this is because User Views get written to permanent memory and are available to all instances of the Measurement in any screen. They survive a Mode Preset and also survive shutdown and restart of the application.
Page 151 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Measurement Name SCPI ID DDEMod Digital Demod DANalyzer Disturbance Analyzer IBSPurious EDR In-band Spurious Emissions EEVM FCAPture Fast Capture FSPectrum Fast Spectrum FMDeviation FM Deviation FMStereo FM Stereo FCOunter Frequency Counter FSCan Frequency Scan PFERror GMSK Phase &...
Page 152 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Measurement Name SCPI ID PMDeviation PM Deviation PAMPlifier Power Amplifier PCONtrol Power Control PSTatistic Power Stat CCDF EPVTime Power vs Time PULSe Pulse EVMQpsk QPSK EVM RTSC Real Time Scan RFPower RF Power SEMask FLATness Spectral Flatness RTSA...
Page 153 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Note that copying this file to another instrument will overwrite the file already in that instrument, if any, and will destroy any User Views that might have been created on that instrument. Note that when you delete the last User View for a measurement, the file is removed. 2.17.5 To Rename a User View You can rename a User View by selecting that View and tapping “Rename User View.”...
Page 154 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor NOTE: There are legacy displays like Marker Table, Peak Table, Measure at Marker and Gate View, which are not Views but special display modes. These are retained for backwards compatibility, however they are turned on and off with switches and do not use the View system.
Page 155 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen 2.18 Multiscreen You can configure up to 16 different Screens at a time. Normally, you only see one Screen, and the set of configured screens is shown across the top of the display in a series of "Screen Tabs"...
Page 156 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen While in Multiscreen View, the button changes from a black background to a blue background: To exit Multiscreen view, tap the button again. Multiscreen View cannot be activated if only one screen is configured. Each Screen contains one Mode, each Mode contains one Measurement, and each Measurement contains a number of Windows arranged in Views.
Page 157 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen – Each Screen has a tab that contains the name of the Mode and Measurement in the box and a number associated with the instance of that Mode. You can enter a custom Screen name that replaces the Mode name, by going into the Mode/Meas dialog –...
Page 158 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen Preset Returns the name of the active screen 2.18.2 Screen List (Remote only command) You can obtain a list of currently configured Screens. This permits your remote program to manage screens for selection, renaming, or deletion. :INSTrument:SCReen:CATalog? Remote Command...
Page 159 2 User Interface 2.19 Fullscreen 2.19 Fullscreen The Fullscreen button is in the "Control Bar" on page 116, at the lower right corner of the display. When Full Screen is pressed the measurement window expands horizontally over the entire instrument display. The screen graticule area expands to fill the available display area.
Page 160 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3 EMI Receiver Mode The EMI Receiver Mode is used for EMI pre-compliance and compliance measurements. EMI pre-scan, search, and final measurements can be done using the Frequency Scan measurement. Monitor Spectrum (IF Mode) is used for maximization.
Page 161 3 EMI Receiver Mode INST:NSEL 6 is an alias to INST:NSEL 141;CONF:FSC 23 for IF analysis mode INST:NSEL 23 is an alias to INST:NSEL 141;CONF: MON 24 for Amplitude Probability Distribution mode INST:NSEL 24 is an alias to INST:NSEL 141;CONF:APD EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 162 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement The Frequency Scan measurement is intended to be used for compliance or precompliance EMI measurements. The display consists of a conventional spectrum graticule display, meters, and signal list at the bottom. Measurement Details A complete Frequency Scan measurement consists of a series of routines, i.e., scanning, search and, a final measurement.
Page 163 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement The detector display on the right side can be turned on and off with a control under the View menu. It also turns off when scanning and making the final measurement. Whenever the meters display is off, the frequency graph expands to fill the entire display area.
Page 164 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Command Return Value Detector 3 vs. Limit Delta (A positive value denote a fail point) If there is no value of amplitude or detector limit delta in the signal list, value 9.91e37 (“not a number”) will be returned. Returns Trace 1 data as a list of x,y pairs.
Page 165 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Meters The meters window on the right shows the instantaneous amplitude of each detector (up to three detectors). The meters display is off during the scan or a final measurement. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 166 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Signal List The Signal List table consists 14 columns. A blue Outline indicates the currently selected signal. 3.1.3 Amplitude The Amplitude front-panel key activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Value as the active function. 3.1.3.1 Y Scale The Y Scale Tab contains controls that pertain to the Y axis parameters of the measurement.
Page 167 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :DISPlay:FSCan:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <rel_ampl> Remote Command :DISPlay:FSCan:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision? :DISP:FSC:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV 5 dB Example :DISP:FSC:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV? Preset 10.00 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state. 0.10 dB 20 dB Annotation The Scale/Div is shown in the upper left side of the graticule display. Y Axis Unit Displays a dropdown menu that enables you to change the vertical (Y) axis amplitude unit.
Page 168 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Examples Unit Example Notes UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBm dBmV UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBmV DBMV dBmA UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBmA DBMA UNIT:POW W Y Axis Unit is set to W UNIT:POW V...
Page 169 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement CALC:UNIT:POW DBMV is an alias to UNIT:POW DBM CALC:UNIT:POW DBPW is an alias to UNIT:POW DBPW CALC:UNIT:POW DBUV_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBUV_MHZ CALC:UNIT:POW DBUA_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBUA_MHZ CALC:UNIT:POW DBPW_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBPW_MHZ CALC:UNIT:POW DBPT_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBPT_MHZ CALC:UNIT:POW DBMV_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBMV_MHZ...
Page 170 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :UNIT:POWer:PMHZ 1 Example Notes This control activates the display of results in units relative to the bandwidth when it is ON. These units are derived from the logarithmic units as shown below: UNIT Relative unit dBmV...
Page 171 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 172 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement You can tell which attenuator configuration you have by pressing the Attenuation tab, which (in most Modes) opens the Attenuation menu. If the first control in the Attenuation menu says Mech Atten you have the Dual-Attenuator configuration. If the first control says Atten you have the Single-Attenuator configuration.
Page 173 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Preset 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state. 0 dB 50 dB (CXA) 60 dB (EXA) 70 dB (MXA, PXA& N9038A) Annotation The attenuation value will be shown in the meas bar as Atten: <total> dB. :INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation Backwards Compatibility...
Page 174 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement be shown. You may switch across ranges on the a-scan trace using the “Next Range” control under the View/Display menu. :SENSe1|SENSe2:SCAN[1]|2|…|10:INPut:ATTenuation Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:INPut:ATTenuation Backwards This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix 1|2 is irrelevant to the measurement; they Compatibility are added solely for remote language compatibility.
Page 175 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement message shown by the control press is also shown in response to the remote command. Dependencies If the selected marker’s frequency is below Band 1, advisory message 0.5001 is generated and no action is taken.
Page 176 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement signal-to-noise ratio and minimizes amplitude variations due to small (short-term) preselector drifting. [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust? :POW:PADJ 100KHz Example :POW:PADJ? Notes The value on the control reads out to 0.1 MHz resolution. Dependencies Grayed out if microwave preselector is off.
Page 177 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement For some measurements, when the preamp is on and any part of the displayed frequency range is below the lowest frequency for which the preamp has specifications, a warning condition message appears in the status line. For example ,for a preamp with a 9 kHz lowest specified frequency: "Preamp: Accy unspec’d below 9 kHz". ...
Page 178 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement selected view range will be shown. You may switch across ranges on the scan trace using the “Next Range” control under the View/Display menu. LNA / LNA (Meters) This control lets you turn the Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) on and off. The LNA is an additional preamplifier which provides superior DANL and frequency range compared to the Internal Preamp. ...
Page 179 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Set Range 3 to Low band Preamp. :FSC:SCAN3:POW:GAIN:BAND? :FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN ON Turn on Internal Preamp of Range 4. :FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN? Dependencies Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the control is not shown.
Page 180 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.4 BW The BW key opens the bandwidth menu, which contains controls for the Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth functions of the instrument. The Resolution BW functions control filter bandwidth and filter type. There are two filter types, Gaussian and Flattop.
Page 181 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement When EMC Standard= CISPR, Center Frequency <150 kHz 200 Hz *150 kHz to <30 MHz 9 kHz *³30 MHz to <1 GHz 120 kHz ³1 GHz 1 MHz * For Click measurement 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz >30 MHz to <1 GHz...
Page 182 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Compatibility are added solely for remote language compatibility. Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix 1|2 is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Res BW (Scan) Specifies the Res BW of the current scan range.
Page 183 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 10 Hz is the minimum value for Time Domain scan. 8 MHz is the maximum equivalent –3 dB RBW, which means that the named RBW (the one shown on the control) can actually exceed 8 MHz if using a filter type other than –3dB. The maximum value for Time Domain scan is 3 MHz.
Page 184 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE NORMal | PULSe Remote Command :SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE? :BAND:TYPE PULS Example :BAND:TYPE? Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for the compatibility purpose. “NORMal”...
Page 185 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y: DLINe[1] | 2 | ... | 4:STATe? :DISP:FSC:WIND:TRAC:Y:DLIN:STAT ON Example Turns on Display Line :DISP:FSC:WIND:TRAC:Y:DLIN -32 dBm Adjust Display Line Couplings When a value is set for the display line, turn it On. When the Display Line goes from Off to On, if it is off screen, set it to either the top or bottom of screen, depending on which direction off screen it was.
Page 186 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.5.2 View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views. Views Windows: "Spectrum" on page 164, "Meters" on page 165, "Signal List" on page 166 There is only one view for the Frequency Scan measurement with multiple-windows. When in a multiple window View, you select a window by touching it.
Page 187 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Backwards The legacy node Compatibility :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] SCPI is retained for backwards compatibility, but it only supports predefined views Restore Layout to Default Restores the Layout to the default for Basic. Modified Views are very temporary; if you exit the current measurement they are discarded, and they are not saved in State.
Page 188 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Rename User View You can rename the current View by giving it a new unique name. Only User Views can be renamed, if the current View is a Predefined View, an error occurs. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName <alphanumeric>...
Page 189 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL:ALL Example Notes Disabled if there are no User Views View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views. The legacy nodes, :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for...
Page 190 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.5.3 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement. Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode. Also turns the graticule Y-Axis annotation on and off.
Page 191 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Trace Annotation Turns on and off the labels on the traces, showing their detector (or their Math Mode) as described in the Trace section, for all windows in all measurements in the current Mode for which Trace Annotation on/off is supported.
Page 192 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :DISP:ANN:MBAR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Display Enable (Remote Command Only) Turns the display on/off, including the display drive circuitry.
Page 193 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Name Command :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Delete All But This Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:CREate Add Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:REName Rename Screen :SYSTem:SEQuencer Sequencer On/Off :DISPlay:ENABle OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:ENABle? :DISP:ENAB OFF Example Couplings :DISP:ENAB OFF turns Backlight :DISP:ENAB ON...
Page 194 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :FREQ:CENT 3 GHZ Example :FREQ:CENT? Notes For the Frequency Scan measurement, when the QPD, EMI Average or RMS Average detector is selected, you will see some delay for meters to reflect the new data due to filtering time. However, if the change in the meters frequency is performed by knob or step keys, there will be no filtering time added unless the change of the meters frequency has triggered other parameter changes.
Page 195 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement In analyzers with an RF Preselector, such as an EMI Receiver, you cannot sweep across the band break at 3.6 GHz while the RF Preselector is on in Continuous sweep, as there is a mechanical switch which bypasses the RF Preselector above 3.6 GHz.
Page 196 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement (EMI Receiver) 513, F13 13.8 GHz 27.0 GHz (all but CXA and an EMI Receiver) 27.0 GHz (EMI Receiver) 526, F26 26.55 GHz (CXA, CXA-m) 43 GHz 44.5 GHz 52 GHz Input 2: Model Max Span (can't set higher than this)
Page 197 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement reaches their limit. Preset 515 MHz State Saved Saved in instrument state. If the Scale Type is set to Lin, the min Midspan Frequency is changed to -79.999995 MHz. 26.999999995 GHz Status Bits/OPC non-overlapped dependencies Start Frequency...
Page 198 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Range Auto|Man If the knob or step keys are being used, it depends on the value of the stop frequency If Scale Type is set to Lin, the min Start Frequency is changed to -80 MHz. Depends on the instrument maximum frequency –...
Page 199 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Couplings In auto, the stop frequency value will couple to the stop frequency of the highest turned-on range in the scan table. If all ranges are off, the stop frequency will be set to 1 GHz. Preset 1 GHz State Saved...
Page 200 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Meter Frequency (Freq) Freq Step Freq<-10 MHz 1% of 100 MHz -10 MHz≤Freq<-1 MHz 1% of 10 MHz -1 MHz≤Freq<-100 kHz 1% of 1 MHz -100 kHz≤Freq<-10 kHz 1% of 100 kHz -10 kHz ≤...
Page 201 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet? Command :FREQ:OFFS 10 MHz Example :FREQ:OFFS Notes Affected Frequency Parameters’ Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526) Preset 0 Hz State Saved Saved in instrument state. -500 GHz 500 GHz Status Bits/OPC...
Page 202 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Spectrum Inversion When set to On, the frequency spectrum is inverted with respect to the carrier frequency. This carrier frequency is obtained via frequency offset, where the hardware center frequency acquisition is Frequency Offset – Center Frequency. [:SENSe]:FREQuency:SINVersion ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command...
Page 203 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.7 Marker Accesses a menu that enables you to select, set up, and control the markers for the current measurement. If there are no active markers, Marker selects marker 1, sets it to Normal, and places it at the center of the display.
Page 204 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:X? Command :CALC:FSC:MARK3:X 9e3 Example :CALC:FSC:MARK3:X? Notes If no suffix is sent, it will use the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis Scale. If a suffix is sent that does not match the current marker X Axis Scale unit, an “Invalid suffix” error will be generated. The query returns the marker’s absolute X Axis value if the control mode is Normal, or the offset from the marker’s reference marker, if the control mode is Delta.
Page 205 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement The SCPI command in the table below selects the marker and sets the marker control mode as described under Normal, Delta, and Off, below. All interactions and dependencies detailed under the control description are enforced when the remote command is sent.
Page 206 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement annunciation from the display, turns off any active function and any marker function, and resets the following properties to their default value: X Axis scale: Auto Band Span: 0 Auto Trace: On Off does not affect which marker is selected.
Page 207 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement All Markers Off Turns off all markers. :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer:AOFF Remote Command :CALC:FSC:MARK:AOFF Example Couple Markers When this function is on, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of every other marker that is not off. By “equal X Axis movement” we mean that we preserve the difference between each marker’s X Axis value (in the fundamental x- axis units of the trace that marker is on) and the X Axis value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental x-axis units).
Page 208 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALC:MARK3:X 3e4 Example Turn on maker 3 in Normal mode, set the marker frequency to 30 kHz. :CALC:MARK3:X? Turn on maker 3 in Normal mode and query the X axis value. Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility.
Page 209 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALC:DELT3:X 3e4 Example Turn on maker 3 in Delta mode, set the relative delta marker frequency to 30 kHz. :CALC:DELT3:X? Turn on maker 3 in Delta mode and query the absolutes X axis value. Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility.
Page 210 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement marker is controlled and how its value is displayed. A marker cannot be relative to itself. :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence <integer> Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence? :CALC:FSC:MARK3:REF 1 Example Sets marker 3’s reference marker to 1 and turns marker 3 on as a delta marker. :CALC:FSC:MARK3:REF? Notes A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out, and if sent from SCPI, generates error...
Page 211 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement on the Settings tab. 3.1.7.4 Peak Search The controls on the Peak Search tab allow you to move the marker to selected peaks of the signal, giving you enormous analysis capabilities, particularly when combined with the Delta Marker function.
Page 212 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MAXimum:NEXT Remote Command :CALC:FSC:MARK2:MAX:NEXT Example Selects marker 2 and moves it to the peak that is closest in amplitude to the current peak, but the next lower value. Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker Next Peak Right Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak to the right of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria.
Page 213 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.7.5 Pk Search Config The Pk Search Config tab contains controls that allow you to setup the Peak Search functions. Since the Pk Search Config functions are independent of the selected Marker, the Select Marker control does not display while in Pk Search Config.
Page 214 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement like the marker Next Pk Right function move only to peaks that rise and fall 6 dB or more. When both Pk Excursion and Pk Threshold are on, a signal must rise above the Pk Threshold value by at least the Peak Excursion value and then fall back from its local maximum by at least the Peak Excursion value to be considered a peak.
Page 215 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALC:MARK:FSCan:PEAK:SEAR:MODE PAR Sets Excursion & Threshold mode :CALC:MARK:FSCan:PEAK:SEAR:MODE PAR For Complex Spectrum this sets Same as Next PK mode Notes MAXimum corresponds to the Highest Peak setting PARameter corresponds to the Same as “Next Peak” Criteria setting Preset MAXimum State Saved...
Page 216 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Measure at Marker When the Measure At Marker control is pressed, the measurement will go to the frequency of the selected marker and take a reading with each of the three detectors selected in the Detectors menu, using the dwell times specified there, and then displays the readings in a window on the display, using the current Y axis unit. ...
Page 217 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement The Measure at Marker box shows the detector name for the selected detectors and “Off” for those not selected. The names used are: Name Detector Peak Peak Neg Peak Negative Peak Quasi Peak Quasi Peak EMI Avg EMI Average...
Page 218 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement The sequence of steps in the measurement is as follows: – During scan, measure at marker control is grayed out. – If the selected marker is off, it is first turned on in the center of the screen and a peak search performed on the marker trace.
Page 219 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Rang – Each result is then displayed in the measure at marker window as it becomes available. – The analyzer returns to its pre-Measure at Marker span and settings after executing a Measure at Marker function, including Bandwidth, and EMC Std. While the function is executing, all the fields except Freq show --- for their values until the measurement is complete for that detector.
Page 220 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Zoom Zooms the graticule display at the selected marker to 10% of current span. :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:FUNCtion:ZOOM Remote Command :CALC:FSC:MARK2:FUNC:ZOOM Example Perform Marker Zoom at Marker 2 Notes If the selected marker is parked at a point near to the edge of the trace data, the span after zoom will remain at 10% of span.
Page 221 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement All Marker To functions executed from the front panel use the selected marker’s values, while all Marker To remote commands specify in the command which marker’s value to use. Marker Frequency The Marker Frequency control is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace.
Page 222 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement before adding signals? Press ENTER to continue or ESC to Cancel. Couplings The newly added signal will become the selected signal in the list. Move Meters to Marker Freq Replaces Frequency (Meters) with the frequency identified by the selected marker. :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TO:METer Remote Command...
Page 223 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Notes No SCPI remote control. Front panel only. Preset Trace On Search Enables you to perform a search. If there are no valid peak signals found, an error is generated saying “No peak signals found”. Notes No SCPI remote control.
Page 224 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :INITiate:RESume Remote Command :INIT:RES Example Couplings When resumed, the label on the control changes to “Pause”. The frequency at which resuming a scan continues depends on the Scan Pause/Resume type. If Scan Pause type is immediate, resuming a scan continues at the meters frequency.
Page 225 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Start/ Stop Sequence Enables you to start the scan, search or final measurement depending on the scan sequence selected. When started, the label on the control changes to Stop. The meters display would turn off during scanning and a final measurement. Pressing Stop will stop the current scan sequence and meters detector will be started automatically.
Page 226 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement If you turn on non-successive ranges, two additional points will be added between the range for limit to work correctly. This increases the total number of scan points by two. Dependencies This control is grayed out during multi range scanning. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 227 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement will change to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop. With the knob or step keys: You cannot increment the Start Freq to a value greater than the Stop Freq – 10 Hz. If you are already in zero span, ...
Page 228 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement part of a “–221, Settings conflict; Function not available while running multirange scan” warning. This control is grayed out during final measurement. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 229 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement This is the same as the Res BW (Scan) control on the Settings tab under BW. See "Res BW (Scan)" on page 182. :FSC:SCAN8:BAND 8e6 Example Set Res BW of Range 8 to 8 MHz. :FSC:SCAN8:BAND? Dwell Time Specifies the dwell time for each step size defined in the selected range.
Page 230 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state. Saved in instrument state. Range Auto|Man The allowable min value is dependent on Range Span and Scan Points. When in Time Domain Scan, the dwell times are based on the following table: Min Dwell Time 10 Hz 10 ms...
Page 231 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement of the screen as “Dwell Time <value>” when Step Control is set to Step and Dwell. When the scan is stopped, the dwell time annotation will stay at the last range. You may see the Dwell Time setting for each scan range by selecting the “Next Range”...
Page 232 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 2.14358881 MHz The first step size will be shown on the Step Size control, where in the example above, the value 1 will be shown. Please take note that Log % of Freq is only available during the Discrete (Stepped) scan. None Dependencies This control is grayed out when the Step Control is set to “Scan Time &...
Page 233 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Option 508: 8.5 GHz Option 513: 13.8 GHz Option 526: 27.0 GHz Annunciation A “#” mark appears before the step size setting in the annotation when the auto mode is turned off. Annotation During scanning, the step size of current active range will be displayed in the lower-right corner of the screen as “(<step>)”...
Page 234 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement part of a “–221, Settings conflict; Function not available with time domain scan type” warning. During Time Domain Scan, the value is automatically set to 4. Changing to another Scan Type from Time Domain to another scan type does not restore the previous value.
Page 235 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Int Preamp Specifies the Internal Preamp state of the selected range. See "Auto Preamp" on page 239 This is the same as the Internal Preamp (Scan) control on the Signal Path tab under Amplitude. ...
Page 236 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Couplings When you change the value of the scan time, the dwell time of the selected range will be changed accordingly, based on the calculation dwell time = scan time / (scan points-1). The Scan Time Auto selection is only available when in Smooth Scan and Discrete Scan.
Page 237 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Points/ RBW The Scan point is calculated based on the number of points for each RBW width, the smallest odd number >= PPRBW*(Stop Frequency-Start Frequency)/RBW will be used as the scan points. Log % of Freq The Step Size is calculated based on the Log % of Freq of the current frequency.
Page 238 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:LPCT <integer> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:LPCT? :FSC:SCAN2:LPCT 2 Example Set the Range 3 to make log scan using 2% of current frequency. :FSC:SCAN2:LPCT? Dependencies This control is grayed out when the Scan type is set to Smooth and Time Domain. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 239 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :SENSe1|SENSe2:SWEep:SPACig Backwards Compatibility SCPI Specifies the LNA (Low Noise Amplifier) state of the selected range. This is the same as the LNA (Scan) control on the Signal Path tab under Amplitude. :FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN:BAND:LNA ON Example Turn on LNA of Range 4.
Page 240 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POWer:GAIN:AUTO? :FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN:AUTO ON Example Turn on Auto preamp for Range 4 :FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN:AUTO? Dependencies This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 241 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:INPut:TYPE Command :SENSe1|SENSe2:SCAN[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10:INPut:TYPE? [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:INPut:TYPE? :SCAN2:INP:TYPE INPUT1 Example Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Auto Step Size Rules (Remote Command) Specifies the Auto Step Size Rules of the selected range. ...
Page 242 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CONF:FSC Example Couplings Selecting Meas Preset will restore all measurement parameters to their default values. 3.1.8.2 Scan The Scan tab enables you to configure a Scan. Scan Sequence Displays the menu controls that enable you to configure the measurement sequence.
Page 243 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:MODE? :FREQ:MODE SCAN Example :FREQ:MODE? Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 of SENSe node is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. CW, FIX and SWEep alias to Smooth.
Page 244 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Step Control Specifies the step control used for the scan table. If Step Size & Dwell Time is selected, the Step Size and Dwell Time controls will appear in the Scan Table. Otherwise, the Scan Points and Scan Time controls will be shown.
Page 245 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement where K is the number of averages accumulated. (In continuous mode, once K has reached the # of Scans, K stays at that value, providing a continuous running average.) [:SENSe]:FSCan:SWEep:COUNt <integer> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:SWEep:COUNt? :FSC:SWE:COUN 10 Example...
Page 246 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement IMMediate = Immediate Preset RBReak State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range At Range Break| Immediate (Meters Frequency) Scan Table The Scan table enables you to configure Scan settings using a visual utility. This is the same as the "Scan Table"...
Page 247 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement generated as part of a “–200, Execution error” warning. This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 248 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 6 dB is selected, peak search functions like the marker Next Pk Right function move only to peaks that rise and fall 6 dB or more. When both Pk Excursion and Pk Threshold are on, a signal must rise above the Pk Threshold value by at least the Peak Excursion value and then fall back from its local maximum by at least the Peak Excursion value to be considered a peak.
Page 249 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE MAXimum | PARameter Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE? :CALC:FSC:MARK:PEAK:SEAR:MODE MAX Example Notes MAXimum corresponds to the Highest Peak setting PARameter corresponds to the Same as “Next Peak” Criteria setting Preset MAXimum State Saved Saved in instrument state.
Page 250 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Dependencies This control and the dialog it calls only appear with the N6141A or W6141A application or when Option EMC is installed and licensed. Presel Center Controls the automatic centering of the preselector for the Measure at Marker function. ...
Page 251 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Compatibility to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Notes Auto Preamp When ON, Int Premp will be considered in the autorange procedure to perform the final measurement. The internal preamp becomes active when the attenuation is reduced to the minimum settable value.
Page 252 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :FSC:FIN:DET3? Notes Not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults. Dependencies This control is grayed out during final measurement. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 253 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. Preset 200 ms|1 s|1 s State Saved Saved in instrument state. 1 ms|1 s|1 s 60 s Limit for ∆...
Page 254 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Dependencies This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 255 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :DISP:MET2 1 Example Turn on Meter 2 :DISP:MET2? Notes When Analog Out for Output Config is set to Screen Video/ Demod Audio, only Meter 1 will return the valid measurement result. Meter 2 & 3 will return -1000dBm if they are turned on ON|OFF|OFF Preset State Saved...
Page 256 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :DET:REC AVER Example Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement; they are added solely for remote language compatibility This SCPI can receive up to 3 detector types, the detector types are separated by a comma. The 2 and 3 parameters in the command are optional.
Page 257 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALC:MET:LIM:STAT OFF Turns off the limit for Meter 1 Preset Not affected by a Mode Preset, is preset by Restore Mode Defaults, survives a power cycle State Saved Saved in instrument state Saved in instrument state -250 dBuV 250 dBuV...
Page 258 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state :INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation:AUTO Backwards Compatibility SCPI Backwards This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 are irrelevant to the Compatibility measurement; they are added solely for remote language compatibility Notes Auto Preamp When ON, Int Preamp will be considered in the autorange procedure for meters and...
Page 259 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Adjustable Peak Hold Time Sets the value of the Adjustable Peak Hold Time. [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:ADJustable <time> Remote Command [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:ADJustable? :MET:PHOL:ADJ 500 ms Example :MET:PHOL:ADJ? Dependencies Grayed-out when Peak Hold Time is set to Infinite Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 260 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement All Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only) Tests all limit lines of meters. Returns 0 if all meters are within the limit, otherwise returns 1. If no limits apply to meters, this query will return a 0. :CALCulate:METer:LIMit:ALL:FAIL? Remote Command...
Page 261 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:RESet:FREQuency ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:RESet:FREQuency? :SENS:MET:PHOL:RES:FREQ 1 Example :SENS:MET:PHOL:RES:FREQ? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state On|Off Range Meters à Signal (Replace) Replaces the frequency of the selected signal with Frequency (Meters). Amplitude values and the Delta To Limit values will be shown as “---“...
Page 262 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement delta values will be updated. Otherwise, the values will be shown as “---“ to indicate an undefined value. :CALCulate:SLISt:REPLace:METer:MAX <integer> Remote Command :CALC:SLIS:REPL:MET:MAX 20 Example Replace Signal #20 with signal obtained at the meters Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed If the selected signal is not in the list, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed...
Page 263 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement [:SENSe]:METer:DETector:DWELl? Command :MET:DET:DWEL 500ms Example :MET:DET:DWEL? Notes When IDN Model = ESU/ESR/ESL, setting the dwell time to values between 100us and <10ms will not return data out of range error. This is for EMC32 backward compatibility Preset 10 ms State Saved...
Page 264 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle:METer? :CALC:MARK:COUP:MET 1 Example :CALC:MARK:COUP:MET? Dependencies Only appears in Frequency Scan and Monitor Spectrum measurements Couplings The Couple Meters to Signal List control will be turned off when this control is turned on Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 265 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Measure/Measure at Marker Detector Specifies the detector to be used (or Off) for each of three detectors to be used in the final Measurement. This is the same detector used for Measure at Marker (or Measure at CF in Monitor Spectrum).
Page 266 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Signal à Meters (Remote Command Only) Moves the Meters to the specified signal in the Signal List, that is, replaces Frequency (Meters) with the frequency of the specified signal. :CALCulate:SLISt:SET:METer <integer> Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SET:METer <integer>...
Page 267 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement If the signal list is not empty, = number of peaks in signal list table State Saved Saved in instrument state Number of peaks in the signal list table Annotation The “sig” column if currently selected signal will be displayed in the table in lime background. A lime cross “X”...
Page 268 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement command will be accepted and obeyed If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed Dependencies Only appears in Frequency Scan, Strip Chart and Monitor Spectrum measurement This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running.
Page 269 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Clear Mark Clears the mark from the selected signal. :CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:SIGNal <integer> Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:SIGNal <integer> :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:SIGNal <integer> :CALC:SLIS:MARK:CLE:SIGN 11 Example Clear mark from signal #11 :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:CLE:SIGN 11 Clear mark from signal #11 :CALC:APD:SLIS:MARK:CLE:SIGN 11 Clear mark from signal #11 Notes...
Page 270 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning Annotation The checkboxes next to the signal numbers are checked Clear All Marks Clears all the marks from the signal list. :CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:ALL Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:ALL :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:ALL :CALC:SLIS:MARK:CLE:ALL...
Page 271 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Sorting signal list by Det vs Limit Delta… Sorting signal list by TimeStamp… If set to Auto, the measurement will perform signal sorting based on the sorting order and sorting type selected before each new signal is added. Otherwise, the signal will be added into the signal list in descending order of the trace amplitude level.
Page 272 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement For Frequency Scan, if the Scan Sequence is set to Remeasure, and Sort By is set to Auto, the signals in the list will only be auto sorted when a Remeasure is completed Dependencies This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running.
Page 273 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement APD signal list Sort By (on the SCPI command Notes control) :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:TYPE Frequency Sort by the Frequency column FREQ :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:DLEV Dist Level Sort by the Dist Level (E meas) column :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:PROB Prblty of Time Sort by the Probability of Time column :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:TYPE...
Page 274 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:DLDelta DET1 | DET2 | DET3 :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:DLDelta? :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:DLDelta? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DLD DET2 Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:DLD DET2 :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DLD? :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:DLD? Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed Couplings Selecting the ∆...
Page 275 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement the Auto Sort state, even if that sort order was already selected ASCending Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Delete Signal Deletes the selected signal. If you access this function from the front panel, the following message will prompt you for confirmation to delete the selected signal from the signal list: This will delete the selected signal.
Page 276 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALCulate:SLISt:DELete:ALL Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:DELete:ALL :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:DELete:ALL :CALC:SLIS:DEL:ALL Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:ALL :CALC:APD:SLIS:DEL:ALL Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed When signals in the signal list were successfully deleted, an advisory is generated...
Page 277 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning Annotation The marked signals will be discarded from the list Delete Unmarked Deletes all unmarked signals in the signal list. If you access this function from the front panel, the following message will prompt you for confirmation to delete the selected signals from the signal list: This will delete the unmarked signals.
Page 278 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Clear Mark (Remote Command Only) Clears marks on all or the current signal. :CALC:EMI:SLIS:CLE ALL Example Clear mark from all signals Notes ALL aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:CLE:ALL CURRent aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:CLE <integer> where integer is the currently selected signal :CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:CLEar ALL | CURRent Backwards Compatibility...
Page 279 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :SENSe1|SENSe2:SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt] Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt] <integer> [:SENSe]:SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt]? Final Measurement (Remote Command Only) Performs a Final Measurement for all signals in the peak list. :INIT:FME Example Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement; they are added solely for remote language compatibility This command is aliased to :FSC:SEQ:REM ALL;...
Page 280 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALC:PEAK:SUBR? Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility This command is aliased to FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN; FSC:SEAR:SUBR:COUN, which actually set # of peaks and # of subranges Preset :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges <integer> Backwards Compatibility :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges? SCPI Insert Signal (Remote Command Only) Adds a frequency value to the signal list.
Page 281 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Dependencies This tab will only appear if you have the proper option installed in your instrument. Preset The limit state and limit arrays (data) survive after preset, and they will only be reset (deleted) by a Restore Mode Defaults.
Page 282 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement [:SENSe]:FSCan:SEARch:PEAK:COUNt <integer> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:SEARch:PEAK:COUNt? [:SENSe]:FSCan:SEARch:PEAK:COUNt:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:FSCan:SEARch:PEAK:COUNt:STATe? :FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN 10 Example :FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN? :FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN:STAT OFF Turns off # of Peaks. Preset Not affected by a Mode Preset, is preset by Restore Mode Defaults, survives a power cycle. State Saved Saved in instrument state.
Page 283 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement If, in the Margin column of the Limits Table, the Margin is on and the Margin Value is non-zero, the margin line is displayed. The margin line is displayed in the same color as the limit line, but paler still and dashed. ...
Page 284 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Margin In the margin column, there are two subcolumns: Value and Enabled. Value sets a margin for this limit, which will cause a trace to Fail Margin when the trace is between the limit line and the margin line. Portions of the traces that pass the limit but fail the margin will be displayed in an amber color. ...
Page 285 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement A trace can have multiple limit lines simultaneously. When you have multiple limit lines simultaneously, only one upper limit line will affect the color of the trace. Other limit lines will be displayed, and will affect the pass/fail status, but the trace will not turn red if it crosses a secondary limit line.
Page 286 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Select Limit Specifies the selected limit. The term “selected limit” is used throughout this document to specify which limit will be affected by the functions. Notes The selected limit is remembered even when not in the Limit Menu. Preset Limit 1, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
Page 287 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement X Offset Offsets the limit trace by some specified frequency (for Frequency-based limit lines) or a time (for time-based limit lines). :CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:X <freq> Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:X? :CALC:FSC:LLIN:OFFS:X –50MHZ Example Sets the X axis offset to –50 MHz. :CALC:FSC:LLIN:OFFS:UPD Applies the X axis offset to all points in the limit line, then reset the X axis offset to zero.
Page 288 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement will be added to each Y value. The offset values will then be reset to zero. The limit trace will not be moved and the limit table will be updated to accurately reflect the currently displayed limit trace. ...
Page 289 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Frequency Enables you tp edit the frequency of the current row. 1 THz Amplitude Enables you to edit the Amplitude of the current row. –1000 dBm 1000 dBm Limit Graph The Limit Graph embedded in the Edit Limit dialog enables you to edit the limit line visually.
Page 290 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Edit Limit Settings The Settings control on the Edit Limits dialog opens up another menu page that enables you to set certain properties of the selected Limit, such as Test Trace, Interpolation, Reference, Fixed/Relative, Description and Comment. The facility to build a Limit from a Trace and to Copy Limits to other Limits is also found here.
Page 291 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Frequency Interpolation Sets the interpolation between frequency points, allowing you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a limit table. The available interpolation modes are linear and logarithmic. If frequency interpolation is logarithmic (Log), frequency values between limit points are computed by first taking the logarithm of both the table values and the intermediate value.
Page 292 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: Note that Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between points in the limit table. The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale, which may be linear or logarithmic.
Page 293 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:FREQuency:CMODe:RELative? Command :CALC:FSC:LLIN:FREQ:CMOD:REL ON Example Makes limit line 1 relative to the Center freq. Notes If the Trace Domain is changed to Time (:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain TIME), the SCPI command : :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:RELative ON|OFF|1|0 will have no effect. Couplings Pressing this control ...
Page 294 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement It is possible to change this setting after a limit line has been entered. When changing from On to Off or vice-versa, the amplitude values in the limit line table change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current reference level settings of the analyzer.
Page 295 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement captured. Secondary parameters that are not associated with traces (Description, Associated Trace, Type, Margin, Interpolation, Relative to CF/RL) will be unchanged. When taking a trace in order to build a limit, it will often work well to take the trace with a resolution bandwidth wider than the expected measurement, a video bandwidth lower than the expected measurement, and with the detector set to Max Hold or Min Hold.
Page 296 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Comment Sets an ASCII comment field, which will be stored in an exported file. The comment can be displayed in the active function area by selecting it as the active function, if desired to be in a screen capture.
Page 297 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement The PASS/FAIL box in the corner of the Meas Bar is only displayed if there is at least one “Trace Pass/Fail” indication displayed in the graticule. If two amplitude values are entered for the same frequency, a single vertical line is the result.
Page 298 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :CALC:LLIN:ALL:DEL Example deletes all data for all limit lines. Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only) Tests a limit line against its associated trace. Returns a 0 if the trace is within the limit and margin, a 1 if the trace exceeds either the limit or the margin.
Page 299 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Limit Line (Remote Command Only) Defines a list of limit line (frequency or time) values for a given limit line. Up to 2000 points may be defined for each limit using the following parameters. <x>...
Page 300 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Limit Line Upper (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard compatibility) Defines a list of amplitude values for a given limit line. Changing the number of elements in the list spectrum will automatically turn the limit line off. Using the “UPP”...
Page 301 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.8.8 Meas Standard Contains controls for configuring the analyzer to the desired measurement standard. EMC Standard Accesses a menu that allows you to select None (no EMI standard), CISPR (CISPR 16-1-1), and MIL (MIL-461A). Each standard has a unique way of determining the couplings between detectors and RBWs, as well as its own set of available RBW’s.
Page 302 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement None When the EMC Standard is set to NONE, the Gaussian normal (-3dB) bandwidths are used. :EMC:STAN NONE Example CISPR When the EMC Standard is set to CISPR, all auto-selected Res Bandwidths are one of the four CISPR bandwidths: 200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz, and 1 MHz.
Page 303 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Range CISPr|MIL for model N9048B with option WF1 Select Range Specifies the selected range. The term “selected range” is used throughout this document to specify which range will be affected by the functions. There are a total of 10 ranges.
Page 304 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Copies the parameters from range 5 of scan table to Spectrum Analyzer mode Dependencies Only appears in the Frequency Scan measurement This control is grayed out during multi range scanning. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 305 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Controls in the CISPR Group This group contains controls to set the following Presets: CISPR A 9 kHz – 150 kHz CISPR B 150 kHz – 30 MHz CISPR C 30 MHz – 300 MHz CISPR C/D 30 MHz –...
Page 306 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Option Max Analyzer Freq (nominal) Width of Band E Number of Points 503 (3.0 GHz models) 3.0 GHz 2.0 GHz 4001 503 (3.6 GHz models 3.6 GHz 2.6 GHz 5201 507 (7 GHz models) 7.0 GHz 6.0 GHz 12001...
Page 307 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Center Frequency <1 kHz 10 Hz 1 kHz to <10 kHz 100 Hz 10 kHz to <150 kHz 1 kHz 150 kHz to <30 MHz 10 kHz 30 MHz to <1 GHz 100 kHz >1 GHz 1 MHz...
Page 308 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :FSC:DEM AM Example Turns ON amplitude demodulation function. :FSC:DEM? Dependencies This control does not appear in model N9048B with option WF1. Attempting to set this parameter via SCPI in this model generates an error message: -241.02 Hardware missing; Not available for this model number.
Page 309 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.8.10 Advanced Allows you to configure functions for the advanced user. Noise Floor Extension Allows you to turn on the Noise Floor Extension function in either of two states, Full or Adaptive. In Full NFE, the expected noise power of the analyzer (derived from a factory calibration) is subtracted from the trace data.
Page 310 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement to External Mixing or BBIQ.” With the introduction of Adaptive NFE, in firmware version A.18.00, the default state of NFE is now Adaptive. Before the introduction of Adaptive NFE, NFE was Off by default. With the introduction of Adaptive NFE, the menu control is changed from On|Off to Full|Adaptive|Off.
Page 311 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Autorange Atten 10 dB Minimum Toggles the autorange attenuation protection to have at least 10 dB always set on the input. [:SENSe]:METer:ATTenuation:PROTection ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:METer:ATTenuation:PROTection? :MET:ATT:PROT ON Example :MET:ATT:PROT?
Page 312 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Remote control deactivated Preset Set to off on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" State Saved Saved in instrument state ESH2-Z5 Phase Enables you to select the phase of the V-network that is used when the ESH2-Z5 V- network is used.
Page 313 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement ENV216 Phase This control enables you to select the phase of the V-network that is used when the ENV216 V-network is used. The V-network is controlled via the AUX IO port. The ENV216 only has two Phase choices (N and L1).
Page 314 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement compatibility with ESU. You can send SENS, SENS1, SENS2 or no prefix at all and it makes no difference. That is, the following commands are all equivalent: – :FME:LISN:PHAS L1 – SENS:FME:LISN:PHAS L1 –...
Page 315 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Turn on N, others off :FME:LISN:PHAS L1,L2,L3,N Turn on all four, L1, L2, L3 and N Notes L2 and L3 are only available in ESH2Z5 (or set to FOURphase) Dependencies Phase N|L1|L2|L3 are grayed out with OFF whereas Phase L2|L3 are grayed out with ENV216. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 316 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :FME:LISN:PHAS L2 Example Turn on L2, others off Dependencies Phase N|L1|L2|L3 are grayed out with OFF whereas Phase L2|L3 are grayed out with ENV216. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Setting Conflict;...
Page 317 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :SENSe1|SENSe2|[:SENSe]:FMEasurement:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe]? :FME:LISN:FILT:HPAS ON Example Notes This control is only available when ENV216 V-network is selected Dependencies This control is grayed out when V-network other than ENV216 is selected. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 318 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Turns on the Protective Earth Float and turns off the Protective Earth Ground :FME:LISN:PEAR GRO,FLO Turns on both Protective Earth Ground and Float Notes This control is only available when ESH2Z5 V-network is selected Dependencies This control is grayed out V-networks other than ESH2Z5 is selected.
Page 319 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement IF Gain Selects the IF Gain used when performing scan. Set to Low Gain to meet CISPR compliance. [:SENSe]:FSCan:IF:GAIN[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:IF:GAIN[:STATe]? :FSC:IF:GAIN ON Example Notes ON = high gain OFF = low gain...
Page 320 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement When Global Center Freq is switched OFF, the Center Frequency of the current Mode is unchanged, but now the Center Frequency of each Mode is once again independent. When Mode Preset is pressed while Global Center Freq is ON, the Global Center Freq is preset to the preset Center Frequency of the current Mode.
Page 321 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Global Limit Lines (Freq and Amptd) When this control is set to ALL, the current Mode’s Limit Line is copied into the Global Limit Lines, and from there to all Modes that support Global settings and use Global Limit Lines, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the Limit Lines remain unchanged.
Page 322 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.9.1 Sweep/Control This tab accesses controls that enable you to operate the Sweep and Control functions of the analyzer, such as Sweep Time and Continuous/Single Continuous/ Single Scan This control determines whether the scan is continuous or a single scan. The scan will not start until you manually initiate the scanning through the Start or Clear List and Start functions.
Page 323 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :INIT:RES Couplings When paused, the label on the control changes to “Resume”. Bit 8 (Paused) of status operation register will be set to true. When resumed, the label on the control changes to “Pause”. When a scan is paused, the meters frequency is coupled to the last frequency where the pause happened.
Page 324 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Compatibility Notes Clear List and Start This control will perform the following when pressed: 1. Prompt you for confirmation to delete all signals in signal list with the following message: 2. After confirmation, performs the selected scan sequence. This will turn the label on the Start control to Stop.
Page 325 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :INITiate[1]:CONTinuous OFF Remote Command :INIT:CONT 0; Example Dependencies This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 326 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement 3.1.10.1 Select Trace Specifies the selected trace. The term “selected trace” is used to specify which trace will be affected when you change trace settings. The Select Trace control appears above the menu panel, indicating that it applies to all controls in the menu panel.
Page 327 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :TRACe[1]|2|3:FSCan:TYPE WRITe | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold Remote Command :TRACe[1]|2|3:FSCan:TYPE? :TRAC:FSC:TYPE WRIT Example TRAC:FSC:TYPE? Notes WRITe = Clear Write. In Clear/Write type each trace update replaces the old data in the trace with new data.
Page 328 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Blank: Update Off and Display Off Background: Update On, Display Off (this allows a trace to be blanked and continue to update “in the background”, which was not possible in the past) See tables below for detail onthe SCPI remote commands to control these two variables.
Page 329 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Preset 1|0|0 (On for Trace 1; Off for 2 & 3) State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range Trace Settings Table The Trace Settings Table enables you to configure the Trace system using a visual utility. ...
Page 330 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement depends on marker functions, trace functions, and trace averaging functions for the current measurement. [:SENSe]:FSCan:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3 POSitive | QPEak | EAVerage | RAVerage Remote Command | AVERage | NEGative [:SENSe]:FSCan:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3? :FSC:DET:TRAC2 EAV Example Set Trace 2 to use EMI Average detector.
Page 331 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement For N9048B model with option WF1, the Average detector and EMI Average are mutual exclusive. If an Average detector is selected, the EMI Average is grayed out. On the other hand, if a EMI average detector is selected, the Average detector is grayed out.
Page 332 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :TRAC:FSC:COPY TRAC1,TRAC3 Example :Copies Trace 1 to Trace 3 and puts Trace 3 in Update=Off, Display=On Notes The TRACe:COPY command is of the form: :TRACe:COPY <source_trace>,<dest_trace> Dependencies When Signal ID is on, this control is grayed out. Couplings The destination trace is put in View (Update=Off, Display=On) after the copy. ...
Page 333 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) This command sends trace data to the instrument or queries the instrument for trace data. The response to the query is a list of amplitude points that comprise the requested trace in the current Y Axis Unit of the analyzer.
Page 334 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement When TRACe3, the latest contents of trace 3 will be returned. When SINGle, the current power values of all activated meters are returned separated by commas in the order meters number. When SCAN, the scan measurement result in the format of Real32 will be returned block by block depends on the scan settings.
Page 335 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement :TRACe:POINts? LIMit :TRAC:POIN LIM,1000 Example :TRAC:POIN? LIM Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. Preset 1000 1000 10000 Trace Display (Remote Command Only) This command sets the trace’s Update state. :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]|2|3[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]|2|3[:STATe]?
Page 336 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.1 Frequency Scan Measurement QPEak Quasi Peak AVERage Average CAVerage EMI Average RMS/ CRMS RMS Average The query will return:- POSitive when Peak Trace Detector is selected. AVER when Average is selected. CAV when EMI Average is selected. CRMS when RMS Average is selected.
Page 337 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement The Monitor Spectrum measurement is an EMI measurement for the X-Series platform that can be used for troubleshooting in pre-compliance and compliance tests. The Monitor Spectrum measurement is capable of measuring a signal and displaying both an RF Spectrum and three EMI detectors simultaneously.
Page 338 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Command Results Returned in Monitor Spectrum traces Returns Trace 3 data as a series of x,y pairs. There are always 2001 points in Monitor Spectrum traces Returns the following comma-separated scalar results: 1.
Page 339 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement than the Meas Time that is set for the meters, the meters will use the Meas Time of the Spectrum display. Spectrum RBW Meas Time 10 Hz 268.5 ms 30 Hz 82.99 ms 100 Hz 26.85 ms 300 Hz...
Page 340 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Graphic In the Scan View, in addition to Spectrum, Signal List Table, and Meters, the Frequency Scan window is displayed (above the Spectrum window). This makes it easy for you to move the meters line up and down the scan to examine specific signals: EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 341 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Graphic View Selection Selects the desired measurement view. :DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[:SELect] NORMal | SCAN Remote Command :DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[:SELect]? :DISP:MON:VIEW NORM Example :DISP:MON:VIEW? Preset NORM State Saved Range Normal|Scan 3.2.2 Windows The following windows are available in the Monitor Spectrum measurement Spectrum The Spectrum window is the fundamental window used in Monitor Spectrum. ...
Page 342 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement not a swept measurement; the Spectrum data is captured and displayed using an FFT. This enables you to change the frequency and span to carefully examine individual signals in the Signal List. Meters The meters window on the right shows the instantaneous amplitude of each of up to three detectors.
Page 343 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Signal List The Signal List table consists of 14 columns. A blue Outline indicates the currently selected signal. Scan The Scan Window is a smaller version of the Frequency Scan window from the Frequency Scan measurement. ...
Page 344 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 3.2.3 Amplitude The Amplitude front-panel key activates the Amplitude menu and selects Ref Value as the active function. 3.2.3.1 Y Scale The Y Scale Tab contains controls that pertain to the Y axis parameters of the measurement.
Page 345 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Y Axis Unit Displays a dropdown menu that enables you to change the vertical (Y) axis amplitude unit. :UNIT:POWer DBM | DBMV | DBMA | V | W | A | DBUV | DBUA | DBPW | DBMV_MHZ | Remote Command DBMA_MHZ | DBUV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBPW_MHZ | :UNIT:POWer?
Page 346 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement UNIT:POW W Y Axis Unit is set to W UNIT:POW V Y Axis Unit is set to V UNIT:POW A Y Axis Unit is set to A dBuV UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBuV DBUV UNIT:POW dBuA...
Page 347 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Preset DBUV Ref Level Offset Adds an offset value to the displayed reference level. The reference level is the absolute amplitude represented by the top graticule line on the display. :DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl> Remote Command :DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet?
Page 348 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are...
Page 349 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control. Dependencies In measurements that support the I/Q inputs, unavailable when I/Q is the selected input. Replaced by the Range tab in that case Dual-Attenuator Configurations Configuration 1: Mechanical attenuator + optional electronic attenuator...
Page 350 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement (Note that depending on the measurement, there may be no Auto/Man functionality on the Mech Atten control.) In the Single-Attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage has only two states. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, both stages have significant range, so you are given separate control of the mechanical and electronic attenuator stages.
Page 351 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 60 dB (EXA) 70 dB (MXA, PXA& N9038A) Annotation The attenuation value will be shown in the meas bar as Atten: <total> dB. :INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation Backwards Compatibility SCPI Backwards This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement; they Compatibility are added solely for remote language compatibility.
Page 352 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :POW:PCEN Example Notes Note that the rules outlined above under the control description apply for the remote command as well as the control. The result of the command is dependent on marker position, and so forth. Any message shown by the control press is also shown in response to the remote command.
Page 353 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement For general purpose signal analysis, using Presel Center is recommended. Centering the filter minimizes the impact of long-term preselector drift. Presel Adjust can be used instead to manually optimize the preselector. One application of manual optimization would be to peak the preselector response, which both optimizes the signal-to-noise ratio and minimizes amplitude variations due to small (short-term) preselector drifting.
Page 354 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement The instrument takes the preamp gain into account as it sweeps. If you sweep outside of the range of the preamp the instrument will also account for that. The displayed result will always reflect the correct gain. For some measurements, when the preamp is on and any part of the displayed frequency range is below the lowest frequency for which the preamp has specifications, a warning condition message appears in the status line. ...
Page 355 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Annotation When scanning, the word “PREAMP” appears in the Meas Bar during a scan if the preamp state of currently active range is set to ON. When a scan is stopped, the preamp setting for the currently selected view range will be shown.
Page 356 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 3.2.4.1 Settings The Settings tab contains the basic Bandwidth functions. It is the only tab under Bandwidth. Res BW (Meters) Activates the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) action function, which enables you to manually set the RBW. For the Monitor Spectrum measurement, this key only affects the RBWs used for meters.
Page 357 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 120 kHz (CF - Band C and D, 30 MHz to 1 GHz). 1 MHz (CF - Band E, 1 GHz to 18 GHz) When MIL is in use, RBW (Meters) in Auto is: 10 Hz (CF - less than 1 kHz) 100 Hz (CF –...
Page 358 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Dependencies Spectrum RBW is limited to specific ranges depending on the Span, as shown in the following table. Span Spectrum RBW Range 10 MHz 10 kHz – 100 kHz 5 MHz 10 kHz – 100 kHz 2 MHz 1 kHz –...
Page 359 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Expand Meters Monitor Spectrum displays the Spectrum on the left and the Meters on the right. When Expand Meters is off, the normal view is presented. When Expand Meters is on, the meters display is expanded and large characters are used for easy viewing at a distance.
Page 360 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Expand Meters On Graphic: :DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW:EXPand:METer[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW:EXPand:METer[:STATe]? :DISP:MON:VIEW:EXP:MET OFF Example :DISP:MON:VIEW:EXP:MET? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Meters RBW Lines When Meters RBW Lines is turned on, two blue vertical lines appear on the display, equal distances from the center of the graticule.
Page 361 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.2.5.2 View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views. Views Windows: "Spectrum" on page 341, "Meters" on page 342, "Signal List" on page 343, "Scan"...
Page 362 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Graphic View Selection Selects the desired measurement view. :DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[:SELect] NORMal | SCAN Remote Command :DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[:SELect]? :DISP:MON:VIEW NORM Example :DISP:MON:VIEW? Preset NORM State Saved Range Normal|Scan User View Lets you choose a View from the saved User Views for the current measurement. This panel only appears if a User View exists for the current measurement.
Page 363 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:SEL “Baseband” Notes You must be in the measurement whose View you are trying to set to send the command. You can only set Views for the current measurement using this command For predefined views, the parameter is derived from the view name that is shown in the View list in the user interface.
Page 364 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement evaluated on a single case <alphanumeric> name already exists as a View, the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value; View <alphanumeric> already exists” is generated If the display is disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict;...
Page 365 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement evaluated on a single case If the <alphanumeric> is not present in the list of View names, the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value; View <alphanumeric> does not exist” is generated If the current View is a Predefined View, the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value; Cannot delete a Predefined View”...
Page 366 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement User View Listing Query Returns a string containing a comma-separated list of names for only the User Views available for the current Measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:USER:CATalog? Remote Command :DISP:VIEW:ADV:USER:CAT? Example Notes Returns a quoted string of the available User Views for the current measurement, separated by commas.
Page 367 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Screen Annotation Controls the display of the annunciation and annotation around the graticule, including any annotation on lines (such as the display line, the threshold line, etc.) and the Y-Axis annotation, for all windows with screen annotation in all measurements in the current Mode.
Page 368 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :DISP:ANN:MBAR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Display Enable (Remote Command Only) Turns the display on/off, including the display drive circuitry.
Page 369 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Name Command :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Delete All But This Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:CREate Add Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:REName Rename Screen :SYSTem:SEQuencer Sequencer On/Off :DISPlay:ENABle OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:ENABle? :DISP:ENAB OFF Example Couplings :DISP:ENAB OFF turns Backlight :DISP:ENAB ON...
Page 370 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer ? Command :FREQ:CENT 3 GHZ Example :FREQ:CENT? Preset 515 MHz State Saved Saved in instrument state. Depends on the instrument minimum frequency. Depends on the instrument maximum frequency. Annotation Freq: <value> appears below the graph. Status Bits/OPC non-overlapped dependencies...
Page 371 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 100 Hz 20 kHz 10 Hz 2 kHz Spectrum RBW is limited to specific ranges depending on the Span, as shown in the following table. Span Spectrum RBW Range 10 MHz 10 kHz – 100 kHz 5 MHz 10 kHz –...
Page 372 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:MONitor:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious Remote Command :MON:FREQ:SPAN:PREV Example sets the span to the previous value CF Step Changes the step size for the Frequency. [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON Example...
Page 373 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet? :FREQ:OFFS 10 MHz Example :FREQ:OFFS Notes Affected Frequency Parameters’ Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526) Preset 0 Hz State Saved Saved in instrument state.
Page 374 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement dwell times specified there. The readings appear in a window on the display, using the current Y axis unit. :CALCulate:MONitor:MACF? Remote Command :CALC:MON:MACF? Example Performs a Measure at Center Frequency with the current meter frequency and returns the results in a query when completed.
Page 375 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALCulate:MONitor:MACF:SLISt Remote Command :CALC:MON:MACF:SLIS Example Notes If there is no free space in the signal list, the following prompt message will ask you whether to continue: WARNING! There is not enough free space in Signal List. Would you like to clear the Signal list before adding signals? ...
Page 376 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 3.2.7 Marker Accesses a menu that enables you to select, set up, and control the markers for the current measurement. If there are no active markers, Marker selects marker 1, sets it to Normal, and places it at the center of the display. If the selected marker is Off, it is set to Normal and placed at the center of the trace with which it is associated.
Page 377 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Mode There are three control modes for markers: Normal (POSition) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value, and whose absolute Y Axis valueis then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value Delta (DELTa) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis offset from a reference marker, and whose absolute Y Axis value is then the...
Page 378 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Normal CALC:MARK2:MODE POS A Normal marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value Delta :CALC:MARK2:MODE...
Page 379 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement All Markers Off Turns off all markers. :CALCulate:MONitor:MARKer:AOFF Remote Command :CALC:MON:MARK:AOFF Example Couple Markers When this function is invoked, moving any marker causes an “equal X Axis movement” of every active marker. By “equal X Axis movement” we mean that the difference between each marker’s X Axis value is preserved (in the fundamental x- axis units of the trace with which the marker is associated), as is the X Axis value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental X-axis units).
Page 380 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Normal Marker State (Remote Command Only) Toggles the Normal marker state on and off. :CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:STATe]? :CALC:MARK4 ON Example Turn on maker 4 in Normal mode. Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. ...
Page 381 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALCulate[1]|2:DELTamarker[1]|2|3|4[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:DELTamarker[1]|2|3|4[:STATe]? :CALC:DELT3 ON Example Turn on marker 3 in Delta mode. Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. This SCPI aliases to :CALC:MON:MARK[1]|2|3|4:MODE DELT.
Page 382 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 3.2.7.3 Peak Search The controls on the Peak Search tab are used to perform peak search using the selected marker. Marker Frequency The Marker Frequency control is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker on the trace.
Page 383 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALC:MON:MARK2:MAX:NEXT Example Selects marker 2 and moves it to the peak that is closest in amplitude to the current peak, but the next lower value. Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker Next Peak Right Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak to the right of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria.
Page 384 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Delta Performs the same function as the Delta key in the Marker menu. This sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta mode and moves the reference marker to the current position of the delta marker. The control is duplicated here for the convenience: you can perform a peak search and change the marker’s control mode to Delta without accessing two separate menus.
Page 385 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state -93.01 dBuV 106.99 dBuV Pk Excursion On/Off Turns the peak excursion requirement on/off and sets the excursion value. The value defines the minimum amplitude variation (rise and fall) required for a signal to be identified as a peak.
Page 386 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Mode This menu enables you to select the mode of Peak Search. When Highest Peak is selected, pressing Peak Search finds the highest peak on the marker’s trace. If Same as “Use Excursion and Threshold”...
Page 387 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Annunciation appears in the marker label of a Delta marker. Annotation appears in the marker label of a Delta marker. Marker Trace :CALCulate:MONitor:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 Remote Command :CALCulate:MONitor:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe?
Page 388 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Frequency The Marker Frequency control is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace. This is the same as the "Marker Frequency " on page control on the Settings tab.
Page 389 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Avg Type Enables you to control the way trace averaging is done by choosing one of the following averaging scales: log-power (video), power (RMS), or voltage averaging. When performing Trace Averaging, the equation that is used to calculate the averaged trace depends on the average type. ...
Page 390 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement reached the Average/Hold Number, K stays at that value, providing a continuous running average.) New avg = ((K–1)Old avg + New data)/K Assumes all values in decibel scale. Pwr Avg (RMS) SCPI Example: MON:AVER:TYPE RMS In this average type, trace averaging processes work on the power (the square of the magnitude) of the signal, instead of its log or envelope voltage.
Page 391 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 3.2.8.2 Meas Standard Contains controls for configuring the analyzer to the desired measurement standard. EMC Standard Accesses a menu that allows you to select None (no EMI standard), CISPR (CISPR 16-1-1), and MIL (MIL-461A). Each standard has a unique way of determining the couplings between detectors and RBWs, as well as its own set of available RBW’s.
Page 392 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement None When the EMC Standard is set to NONE, the Gaussian normal (-3dB) bandwidths are used. :EMC:STAN NONE Example CISPR When the EMC Standard is set to CISPR, all auto-selected Res Bandwidths are one of the four CISPR bandwidths: 200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz, and 1 MHz.
Page 393 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Range CISPr|MIL for model N9048B with option WF1 3.2.8.3 Meters Lets you set up the meters as desired. Meters Config Lets you configure the Meters using a visual utility. This column lets you set the state of the selected Meter.
Page 394 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Dependencies If an EMI detector ( QPD or EMI Average or RMS Average) is already selected for two of the detectors, then the other EMI detector is grayed out. For example, if Detector 1 is QPD and Detector 2 is EMI Average, then for Detector 3, RMS Average is grayed out.
Page 395 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement which means if there are 2 detector parameters sent, meter 1 and 2 will be turned on, and meter 3 will be turned off POSitive Preset :SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive | NEGative | Backwards RMS | AVERage | QPEak | CAVerage | CRMS,POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage Compatibility | QPEak | CAVerage | CRMS,POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | QPEak |...
Page 396 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict; Feature not supported for this measurement” warning Couplings If not “Off”...
Page 397 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement SCPI Backwards This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 are irrelevant to the Compatibility measurement; they are added solely for remote language compatibility Notes Peak Hold Time Accesses a menu that lets you set the peak hold time of the meters. If set to Adjustable, the max hold line and max result of the meters will be reset for each due of a peak hold time.
Page 398 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only) Tests a limit line against its associated meter. Returns a 0 if the meter is within the limit, a 1 if the meter exceeds either limit. Note that this command only tests one limit line – other limit lines are not tested when executing this command.
Page 399 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Reset Peak Hold Resets the peak hold line for all meters that are turned ON to the current signal value. [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:RESet Remote Command :MET:PHOL:RES Example Reset Peak Hold On Freq Change Resets the peak hold line for all meters that are turned to the current signal value on meter frequency change.
Page 400 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement will be updated. Otherwise, the values will be shown as “---“ to indicate an undefined value. :CALCulate:SLISt:APPend:METer:MAX Remote Command :CALC:SLIS:APP:MET:MAX Example Append signal obtained at meters into signal list Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed If the selected signal is not in the list, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed Dwell Time Specifies the dwell time for the meters.
Page 401 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Couplings The Couple Meters to Marker control will be turned off when this control is turned on Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state On|Off Range [:SENSe]:FSCan:SLISt:COUPle:METer ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Backwards Compatibility [:SENSe]:FSCan:SLISt:COUPle:METer?
Page 402 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Blank, or Background). This is the same as Trace Type on the Trace Control tab under Trace. Scan/Spectrum Detector The second column under Scan (Frequency Scan measurement) or Spectrum (Monitor Spectrum Measurement) lets you view the Detector for each Trace, and in Frequency Scan, lets you set the detector as well (in Monitor Spectrum, all traces use the Sample detector).
Page 403 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :FIN:DET:COUP 1 Example :FIN:DET:COUP? Dependencies When Couple Measure to Meters Detectors is turned on, the Final Measurement Detectors are grayed out following the rules of the Meter Detectors. See EMI Receiver Mode PD under Meas Setup, Meters, Meters Config, Detector (Meter) Preset State Saved...
Page 404 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Select Signal Specifies the selected signal. The term “Selected signal” is used throughout this document to specify which signal will be affected by the functions. Notes Front panel only When Select Signal is the active function, press UP to go up in the signal list, and press DOWN to go down in the list Dependencies Couplings...
Page 405 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Mark Duplicates All Marks all duplicate signals. :CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:DUPLicates[:ALL] Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:MARK:DUPLicates[:ALL] :CALC:SLIS:MARK:DUPL Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:DUPL Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from any measurement, and the command will be accepted and obeyed If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed Dependencies...
Page 406 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALC:SLIS:MARK:DUPL:LOW Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:DUPL:LOW Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from any measurement, and the command will be accepted and obeyed If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed Dependencies Only appears in Frequency Scan, Strip Chart and Monitor Spectrum measurements This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running.
Page 407 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:MARK:ALL :CALC:SLIS:MARK:ALL Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:ALL :CALC:APD:SLIS:MARK:ALL Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed Dependencies...
Page 408 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement For the Frequency Scan/Monitor Spectrum/Strip Chart signal list, you can sort based on the frequency, detector amplitude, detector vs. limit delta or timestamp in ascending or descending order. For the APD signal list, you can sort by Frequency, Disturbance Level, Probability of Time, or timestamp in ascending or descending order.
Page 409 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List For Frequency Scan, if the Scan Sequence is set to Remeasure, and Sort By is set to Auto, the signals...
Page 410 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Sort By (on SCPI command Notes the control) Detector 2 in the Measure Config dialog on the MEASURE tab) :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DLD Det 3 Delta to Sort by the Detector 3 delta-to-limit column DET3 Limit Line (the limit line used is that associated with Detector 3 in the Measure Config dialog on the...
Page 411 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement command) will turn on the Auto Sort state, even if that detector amplitude type was already selected DET1 Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Detector 1 | Detector 2 | Detector 3 Range Choose Detector for sorting by D Limit Specifies which detector will be used for sorting based on limit line delta amplitude...
Page 412 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:ORD DESC :CALC:SLIS:SORT:ORD :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:ORD :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:ORD Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List Dependencies This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running.
Page 413 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Dependencies This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 414 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:DELete:MARKed :CALC:SLIS:DEL:MARK Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:MARK :CALC:APD:SLIS:DEL:MARK Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed If no marked signal is found in the signal list, an error is generated and Delete Marked cannot be...
Page 415 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Mark Signal (Remote Command Only) Marks signals based on the selected parameter, either current, duplicate or all. :CALC:EMI:SLIS:MARK DUPL Example Marks duplicated signals Notes CURRent aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK <integer> where integer is the currently selected signal DUPLicate aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:DUPL ALL aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:ALL :CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:MARK CURRent | DUPLicate | ALL...
Page 416 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Range Count (Remote Command Only) Specifies the number of ranges to turn on beginning with range 1 in ascending order. :SCAN:RANG 4 Example Turn on Range 1 to 4 Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement; they are added solely for remote language compatibility Dependencies This function is not available when a scan sequence is running.
Page 417 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Selects subrange method Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility SUBRange aliases to:FSCan:SEARch:MODE SLIM; CALC:FSC:MARK:PEAK:SEAR:MODE MAX, which actually set Search Criteria = “Subrange and Limits” and Peak Criteria = “Highest Peak” PEAK aliases to :FSCan:SEARch:MODE PLIM;...
Page 418: The Pass/Fail Box In The Corner Of The Meas Bar Is Only Displayed If There Is At Least One "Trace Pass/Fail" Indication Displayed In The Graticule
3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALC:PEAK:CLE Example Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility This command is aliased to FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN:STAT; CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:ALL, which actually set # of peaks State = ON and delete all signals :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:CLEar[:IMMediate] Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.2.8.5 Limits...
Page 419 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Traces that are not updating (in View, for example) will not change color if the analyzer X-axis settings (e.g., start and stop frequency) do not match those of the trace, for example if they have been changed since the trace stopped updating. In this case, the Invalid Data indicator (*) will appear in the upper right corner.
Page 420 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:MARGin <rel_ampl> Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:MARGin? :CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:MARGin:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:MARGin:STATe? :CALC:FSC:LLIN6:MARG -4dB Example Set Limit line 6’s margin to -4 dB. :CALC:FSC:LLIN2:MARG:STAT OFF Turns off the margin for limit line 2 and removes any tests associated with that margin line. Notes The queries “Limit Line Fail?”...
Page 421 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Edit Limit The Edit Limit dialog enables you to edit the content and the properties of the Limit Line. When entering the menu, the editor window (with the limit table) turns On, the selected Limit is turned On, and the amplitude scale is set to Log.
Page 422 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 2000 Insert Row Below Pressing this control inserts a row below the current row. The new row is a copy of the current row and becomes the current row. The new row is not yet entered into the underlying table, and the data in the row is displayed in light gray.
Page 423 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state -500 GHz 500 GHz Y Offset Offsets all segments in the limit line by some specified amplitude. :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:Y <rel_ampl> Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:Y? :CALC:LLIN:OFFS:Y -3 dB Example Sets the Y axis offset to -3 dB.
Page 424 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Delete Limit Deletes the currently selected limit line. Pressing Delete Limit purges the data from the limit line tables. Limit data, including secondary parameters such as description, margin value, etc.., will be cleared and returned to factory preset settings. When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK key to delete limit.
Page 425 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Interpolation, Reference, Fixed/Relative, Description and Comment. The facility to build a Limit from a Trace and to Copy Limits to other Limits is also found here. Select Limit Specifies the selected limit. The term “selected limit” is used throughout this document to specify which limit will be affected by the functions.
Page 426 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement interpolation is then performed in this logarithmic frequency space. An exactly analogous manipulation is done for logarithmic amplitude interpolation. Note that the native representation of amplitude is in dB. For linear amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: For linear amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as:...
Page 427 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement The Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between NOTE points in the limit table. The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale, which may be linear or logarithmic. :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE LOGarithmic | LINear Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE?
Page 428 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Preset Not affected by Mode Preset, is preset by Restore Mode Defaults, survives in a power cycle. State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On|Off Amplitude Interpolation Sets the interpolation to linear or logarithmic for the specified limiting points set, allowing you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a limit table.
Page 429 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Makes limit line 1 relative to the reference level amplitude. Couplings Pressing this button makes Reference level the active function. Preset Not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults, survives in a power cycle. State Saved Saved in instrument state Range...
Page 430 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement The limit will be built above the trace. If the trace is constant, the limit should pass after being built. :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:BUILd TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 Remote Command :CALC:LLIN2:BUIL TRACE1 Example Builds limit line 2 based on the data in trace 1. This will overwrite the data in the table editor. Notes Auto return to Edit menu.
Page 431: If Two Amplitude Values Are Entered For The Same Frequency, A Single Vertical Line Is
3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :CALC:LLIN:COMM "European Emissions" Example Preset “” (null String), not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults, survives in a power cycle. State Saved Saved in instrument state Annotation When Trace Annotation under Display menu is turned on, limit comment will be displayed as part of the label next to the limit line on the graph.
Page 432: The Limit Is Turned On
3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement the limit is turned on (exception: the query :CALCulate:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL? tests only the limits that are turned on for that trace). :CALCulate:LLINe:TEST OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe:TEST? :CALC:LLIN:TEST ON Example turns on testing, and displays the results in the upper left corner.
Page 433 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only) Defines a list of control values for a given limit line (frequency or time). Up to 2000 points may be defined for each limit using the following parameters. <x> Frequency or time values as specified by :Calculate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain.
Page 434 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement The points query returns the number of points in the amplitude list. It will not be possible to turn on the limit line unless the number of points in the control matches the number of points in the amplitude.
Page 435 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Turns ON amplitude demodulation function. :MON:DEM? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range AM|FM|Off :SENSe1|SENSe2:DEMod OFF | AM | FM Backwards Compatibility [:SENSe]:DEMod? SCPI Backwards This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix 1|2 is irrelevant to the measurement; they Compatibility are added solely for remote language compatibility.
Page 436 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement In Adaptive NFE, there is not the same dramatic visual impact on the noise floor as there is in Full NFE. Adaptive NFE controls the amount of correction that is applied based on other analyzer settings like RBW, averaging and sweep time. Adaptive NFE controls the degree of potential improvement in the noise floor to give more improvement for those analyzer settings that can make good use of the potential improvement, such as settings that provide more averaging.
Page 437 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor? :CORR:NOIS:FLO ON Example Dependencies This control only appears in instruments with the NFE or NF2 license installed. In all others, the control does not appear, however the SCPI command will be accepted without error (but will have no effect) Couplings...
Page 438 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state :INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation:PROTection Backwards Compatibility [:SENSe]:FSCan:FINal:ATTenuation:PROTection SCPI Backwards This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement; Compatibility they are added solely for remote language compatibility Notes LISN Control Settings Lets you set up the LISN (Line Impedance Stabilization Network, or V-Network) for...
Page 439 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Dependencies L2, L3 controls are grayed out when ENV216 is selected. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–224, Illegal parameter value;...
Page 440 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Phase N | Phase L1 | Phase L2 | Phase L3 Range Only one phase can be selected ENV216 150 kHz Highpass Controls the highpass setting on the V-network. :INPut[1]|2:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] ON | OFF Remote Command :INPut[1]|2:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe]?
Page 441 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Preset System IDN Response, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.2.8.8 Global The controls in this menu apply to all Modes in the instrument. Some controls (for example, "Global Center Freq"...
Page 442 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Preset :GLOBal:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe] 1 | 0 | ON | OFF Backwards Compatibility SCPI :GLOBal:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe]? Global EMC Std When this control is switched ON, the current Mode’s EMC Std is copied into the Global EMC Std, and from then on all Modes that support global settings use the Global EMC Std, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the EMC Std remains unchanged.
Page 443 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement This function is reset to NONE when "Restore Defaults" on page 748 is pressed, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed. :INSTrument:COUPle:LLINe ALL | NONE Remote Command :INSTrument:COUPle:LLINe? :INST:COUP:LLIN ALL | NONE Example :INST:COUP:LLIN? Preset...
Page 444 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement puts analyzer in Single measurement operation. :INIT:CONT OFF puts analyzer in Single measurement operation. :INIT:CONT 1 puts analyzer in Continuous measurement operation. :INIT:CONT ON puts analyzer in Continuous measurement operation Preset (Note that SYST:PRESet sets INIT:CONT to ON but *RST sets INIT:CONT to OFF) State Saved Saved in instrument state Annunciation...
Page 445 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Notes restart Max Hold and Min Hold. In the X-Series, the Restart hardkey and the INITiate:RESTart command restart not only Trace Average, but MaxHold and MinHold traces as well. For wireless comms modes in ESA and PSA, the Restart hardkey and the INITiate:RESTart command restart every measurement, which includes all traces and numeric results.
Page 446 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement If the analyzer is set for Continuous measurement, it sets up the measurement and initiates a new data measurement sequence with a new data acquisition (sweep) taken once the trigger condition is met. If the analyzer is set for Single measurement, it remains in the "idle"...
Page 447 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement 3.2.10.2 Trace Control The controls on the Trace Control tab allow you to set the type of the Trace and its update mode. There are four trace Types: Clear/Write, Trace Average, Max Hold and Min Hold. Each type handles data in a different way.
Page 448 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Value Example Notes Clear/Write :TRAC2:TYPE In Clear/Write type each trace update replaces the old data WRIT in the trace with new data. Selecting Clear/Write clears the trace and initiates a new sweep. Trace Average :TRAC2:TYPE In Trace Average type the analyzer maintains and displays...
Page 449 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Max Hold In Max Hold type the analyzer maintains and displays a max hold trace, which represents the maximum data value on a point-by-point basis of the new trace data and previous trace data. Pressing the Max Hold key for the selected trace, or sending the :TRAC:TYPE MAXH command for the specified trace, sets the trace type to Max Hold, causes the trace...
Page 450 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]|2|3[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]|2|3[:STATe]? :DISP:TRAC OFF Example :DISP:TRAC? Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 and [1]|2|3 are irrelevant to the measurement;...
Page 451 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement "Trace Display State On/Off" on page 451 Notes The four states of this Dropdown actually set two variables, Update and Display, to their four possible combinations: – Active: Update and Display both On –...
Page 452 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace Settings Table The Trace Settings Table enables you to configure the Trace system using a visual utility. 3.2.10.3 Trace Function The Trace Function tab enables you to copy and exchange traces and preset or clear all traces.
Page 453 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.2 Monitor Spectrum Measurement To Trace Selects the trace to be copied from the From Trace parameter. Notes See “Copy”. Preset Copy This control executes a Trace Copy based on the From Trace and To Trace parameters.
Page 454 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement The Strip Chart measurement is an EMI measurement for the X-Series platform that can be used for troubleshooting in CISPR pre-compliance and compliance test. It is capable of measuring a signal at a single frequency in real time with three EMI detectors simultaneously and no gaps.
Page 455 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Command Results Returned 1. Max measurement result’s frequency values of Meter 1 2. Max measurement result’s frequency values of Meter 2 3. Max measurement result’s frequency values of Meter 3 Note: Returns (9.91E37) if the Meter is not available 3.3.1 Views Windows:...
Page 456 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Graph The graph window displays the history of the meters values. The most recent value is on the right. The graph flows from right to left. You can change the X-axis scale to see older signals using the Sweep menu.
Page 457 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 458 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 459 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 460 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Meters The meter window displays the meters of the Strip Chart measurement. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 461 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Signal List Table The Signal List Table window consists of 14 columns. The blue outline indicates the currently selected signal. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 462 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.3 Amplitude The Amplitude front-panel key activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Level as the active function. 3.3.3.1 Y Scale The Y Scale Tab contains controls pertinent to the Y axis parameters of the measurement.
Page 463 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 20.00 dB Annotation Scale/Div is shown in the upper left side of the display Y Axis Unit Displays a dropdown menu that enables you to change the vertical (Y) axis amplitude unit. :UNIT:POWer DBM | DBMV | DBMA | V | W | A | DBUV | DBUA | DBPW | DBMV_MHZ | Remote Command DBMA_MHZ | DBUV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBPW_MHZ |...
Page 464 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement DBMV dBmA UNIT:POW Y Axis Unit is set to dBmA DBMA UNIT:POW W Y Axis Unit is set to W UNIT:POW V Y Axis Unit is set to V UNIT:POW A Y Axis Unit is set to A UNIT:POW dBµV Y Axis Unit is set to dBµV...
Page 465 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement CALC:UNIT:POW DBUA_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBUA_MHZ CALC:UNIT:POW DBPW_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBPW_MHZ CALC:UNIT:POW DBPT_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBPT_MHZ CALC:UNIT:POW DBMV_MHZ is an alias to UNIT:POW DBMV_MHZ Preset DBUV Ref Level Offset...
Page 466 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 467 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control. Dependencies In measurements that support the I/Q inputs, unavailable when I/Q is the selected input.
Page 468 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Attenuation menu says Mech Atten you have the Dual-Attenuator configuration. If the first control says Atten you have the Single-Attenuator configuration. (Note that depending on the measurement, there may be no Auto/Man functionality on the Mech Atten control.) In the Single-Attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage has only two states.
Page 469 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state. 0 dB 50 dB (CXA) 60 dB (EXA) 70 dB (MXA, PXA& N9038A) Annotation The attenuation value will be shown in the meas bar as Atten: <total> dB. :INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation Backwards Compatibility...
Page 470 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter Remote Command :POW:PCEN Example Notes Note that the rules outlined above under the control description apply for the remote command as well as the control. The result of the command is dependent on marker position, and so forth. Any message shown by the control press is also shown in response to the remote command.
Page 471 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement For general purpose signal analysis, using Presel Center is recommended. Centering the filter minimizes the impact of long-term preselector drift. Presel Adjust can be used instead to manually optimize the preselector. One application of manual optimization would be to peak the preselector response, which both optimizes the signal-to-noise ratio and minimizes amplitude variations due to small (short-term) preselector drifting.
Page 472 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement The instrument takes the preamp gain into account as it sweeps. If you sweep outside of the range of the preamp the instrument will also account for that. The displayed result will always reflect the correct gain. For some measurements, when the preamp is on and any part of the displayed frequency range is below the lowest frequency for which the preamp has specifications, a warning condition message appears in the status line. ...
Page 473 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Annotation When scanning, the word “PREAMP” appears in the Meas Bar during a scan if the preamp state of currently active range is set to ON. When a scan is stopped, the preamp setting for the currently selected view range will be shown.
Page 474 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.4.1 Settings The Settings tab contains the basic bandwidth functions. It is the only tab under the BW menu. Res BW Activates the Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW) action function, which allows you to manually set the Res BW.
Page 475 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz >30 MHz to <1 GHz 120 kHz When EMC Standard= MIL, Center Frequency < 1 kHz 10 Hz 1 kHz to < 10 kHz 100 Hz 10 kHz to <...
Page 476 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Filter BW will be set to Noise when the IDN Model = System IDN Response. For other IDN Models, the Filter BW will be set to DB3. This is for ESU Backwards Compatibility. Dependencies DB3|DB6|IMPulse are not available when the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL.
Page 477 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Expand Meters Enables you to enlarge annotation/indicator of the meters graph display. The display includes Peak power of meters readings and frequencies where the peak power of meters occurs. :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW:EXPand:METer[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW:EXPand:METer[:STATe]?
Page 478 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement User View Lets you choose a View from the saved User Views for the current measurement. This panel only appears if a User View exists for the current measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect <alphanumeric> Remote Command :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect? Example...
Page 479 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement If the specified view is not a valid View, the query returns the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value; View with the name <alphanumeric> does not exist” :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict; If the display is disabled (via View SCPI cannot be used while Display is disabled”...
Page 480 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Rename User View You can rename the current View by giving it a new unique name. Only User Views can be renamed, if the current View is a Predefined View, an error occurs. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName <alphanumeric>...
Page 481 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL:ALL Example Notes Disabled if there are no User Views View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views. The legacy nodes, :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for...
Page 482 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.5.3 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement. Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode. Also turns the graticule Y-Axis annotation on and off.
Page 483 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Control Annotation Turns on and off the display of values on the Active Function controls for all measurements in the current Mode. This is a security feature. :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe]? :DISP:ACT OFF...
Page 484 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement – and you are in local operation, the display can be turned back on by pressing any key or by sending :SYSTem:DEFaults MISC :DISPlay:ENABle ON (neither *RST nor :SYSTem:PRESet enable the display) –...
Page 485 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.6 Freq The Freq key opens the Frequency menu, which contains controls for the frequency parameters of the instrument. Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements in the current Mode.
Page 486 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON Example :FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz :FREQ:CENT UP Increases the current center frequency value by 500 MHz :FREQ:CENT:STEP? :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Notes Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 508, 513, 526, 544)
Page 487 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state. -500 GHz 500 GHz Status Bits/OPC Non-overlapped dependencies :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:OFFSet Backwards Compatibility SCPI Backwards The DISPlay version of the command is in the instrument for compatibility across platforms and is not Compatibility recommended for new development.
Page 488 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.7.1 Select Marker Displays a menu with 12 markers available for selection. Notes Front panel only. The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used Preset Marker 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 489 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Normal (POSition) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value, and whose absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value.
Page 490 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Sets Marker 1 to Normal. Couplings The marker addressed by this command becomes the selected marker on the front panel. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Annunciation Annunciation in the marker result block in the upper-right corner of the display indicates the X Axis value and Y-axis result of the marker.
Page 491 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement marker is already a Delta marker, the reference marker is moved to the current position of the selected marker, thus resetting the Delta to zero. Marker Settings Diagram The Marker Settings Diagram enables you to configure the Marker system using a visual utility. ...
Page 492 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement axis units of the moved marker’s trace) and the X Axis value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental x-axis units). This may result in markers going off screen. :CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]?
Page 493 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement State Saved Next Peak Moves the selected marker to the next highest local maximum smaller than the current value. If the selected marker is Off, it is turned on as a normal marker and a peak search is performed.
Page 494 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement -221: “Settings conflict; marker cannot be relative to itself.” When queried, a single value will be returned - the specified marker number’s relative marker. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Annunciation appears in the marker label of a Delta marker.
Page 495 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Marker Time Refer to Marker Time in on the Settings Tab. Marker Zoom The Marker Zoom feature provides functions that enable you to see more details of the traces in the strip chart of the measurement. After pressing marker zoom, a marker is placed on the center of the strip chart if no active marker is available.
Page 496 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Marker Zoom Out Full Marker Zoom Out Full will display the strip chart with the span of the strip chart that existed before a Marker Zoom was performed. :CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:FUNCtion:ZOOM:CLEar Remote Command :CALC:SCH:MARK1:FUNC:ZOOM:CLE Example Notes You must be in the mode that includes Strip Chart ...
Page 497 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.8.1 Meters Lets you set up the meters as desired. Meters Config Lets you configure the Meters using a visual utility. This column lets you set the state of the selected Meter. If the meter is turned on, a check box will be shown in the box and the measurement will be performed using the corresponded detector type.
Page 498 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement then the other EMI detector is grayed out. For example, if Detector 1 is QPD and Detector 2 is EMI Average, then for Detector 3, RMS Average is grayed out. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 499 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement POSitive Preset :SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] POSitive | NEGative | Backwards RMS | AVERage | QPEak | CAVerage | CRMS,POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage Compatibility | QPEak | CAVerage | CRMS,POSitive | NEGative | RMS | AVERage | QPEak | SCPI CAVerage | CRMS :SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion]?
Page 500 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Couplings If not “Off” been selected, the value of meter limit line will be change to the value of which limit line been selected at current meter frequency Preset Not affected by a Mode Preset, is preset by Restore Mode Defaults, survives a power cycle State Saved Saved in instrument state Off|LIMit1|LIMit2|LIMit3|LIMit4|LIMit5|LIMit6...
Page 501 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Peak Hold Time Accesses a menu that lets you set the peak hold time of the meters. If set to Adjustable, the max hold line and max result of the meters will be reset for each due of a peak hold time.
Page 502 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only) Tests a limit line against its associated meter. Returns a 0 if the meter is within the limit, a 1 if the meter exceeds either limit. Note that this command only tests one limit line – other limit lines are not tested when executing this command.
Page 503 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Reset Peak Hold Resets the peak hold line for all meters that are turned ON to the current signal value. [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:RESet Remote Command :MET:PHOL:RES Example Reset Peak Hold On Freq Change Resets the peak hold line for all meters that are turned to the current signal value on meter frequency change.
Page 504 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement will be updated. Otherwise, the values will be shown as “---“ to indicate an undefined value. :CALCulate:SLISt:APPend:METer:MAX Remote Command :CALC:SLIS:APP:MET:MAX Example Append signal obtained at meters into signal list Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed If the selected signal is not in the list, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed Dwell Time Specifies the dwell time for the meters.
Page 505 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Couplings The Couple Meters to Marker control will be turned off when this control is turned on Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state On|Off Range [:SENSe]:FSCan:SLISt:COUPle:METer ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Backwards Compatibility [:SENSe]:FSCan:SLISt:COUPle:METer?
Page 506 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement This is the same as Detector in the Measure Config dialog in the Frequency Scan measurement . Meter On /Off The checkbox column under Meters lets you turn on and off each meter. If the check mark is visible, the meter is turned on, and will be shown in the display.
Page 507 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.8.2 Signal List Enables you to access the signal list related functions for Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, Monitor Spectrum and APD measurements. The Signal List used for Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, and Monitor Spectrum NOTE measurements is a DIFFERENT Signal List than that used for the APD measurement.
Page 508 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Mark signal #4 Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed If the selected signal is not in the list, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed...
Page 509 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 510 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Dependencies This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 511 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed Dependencies Only appears in Frequency Scan, Strip Chart and Monitor Spectrum measurements This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 512 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:AUTO? :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:SORT:AUTO? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE FREQ Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE FREQ :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:TYPE FREQ :CALC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE? :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE? :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:TYPE? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart,...
Page 513 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Sort By (on SCPI command Notes the control) :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP Det 1 Amptd Sort by the Detector 1 Amplitude column DET1 :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP Det 2 Amptd Sort by the Detector 1 Amplitude column DET2 :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP Det 3 Amptd Sort by the Detector 1 Amplitude column...
Page 514 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:DAMPlitude ? :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:DAMPlitude ? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP DET2 Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP DET2 :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP? :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP? Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed Couplings Selecting the detector amplitude type to be sorted (pressing the or sending the equivalent SCPI command) will turn on the Auto Sort state, even if that detector amplitude type was already selected...
Page 515 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:ORDer ASCending | DESCending Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:ORDer ASCending | DESCending :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:SORT:ORDer ASCending | DESCending :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:ORDer? :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:ORDer? :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:SORT:ORDer? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:ORD DESC Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:ORD DESC :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:ORD DESC :CALC:SLIS:SORT:ORD :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:ORD :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:ORD Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List Dependencies...
Page 516 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :CALC:APD:SLIS:DEL:SIGN 4 Delete signal #4 Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed When signals in the signal list were successfully deleted, an advisory is generated...
Page 517 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Delete Marked Deletes all marked signals in the signal list. If you access this function from the front panel, the following message will prompt you for confirmation to delete the selected signals from the signal list: This will delete the marked signals.
Page 518 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:UNM :CALC:APD:SLIS:DEL:UNM Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed When signals in the signal list were successfully deleted, an advisory is generated Dependencies...
Page 519 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :CALC:EMI:SLIS:DEL ALL Example Delete all signals Notes ALL aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:ALL CURRent aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL <int> where integer is the selected signal MARKed aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:MARK UNMarked aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:UNM :CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:DELete ALL | CURRent | MARKed | UNMarked Backwards Compatibility SCPI...
Page 520 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :INITiate[1]|2:FMEasurement Backwards Compatibility SCPI Search Method (Remote Command Only) Defines the search method with which maxima are searched for within a scan. :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod SUBRange | PEAK Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod :CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR Example Selects subrange method Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility...
Page 521 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility When this command is sent, # of peaks State will be set to ON, this is equivalent to FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN:STAT ON command :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:ADD <Numeric Value> Backwards Compatibility SCPI...
Page 522 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement For model N9048B with option WF1, only CISPr|MIL are available. Attempting to set this parameter to NONE via SCPI in this model generates an error message: -241.02 Hardware missing; Not available for this model number Couplings When the EMC Standard changes to None, the Filter Type is set to Gaussian and the Filter BW is set to -3 dB...
Page 523 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement The Res BW can also be selected manually. For this purpose, a set of Impulse bandwidths in a 1–3–10 sequence is provided to fill in the gaps between the compliant bandwidths. We label these bandwidths “Impulse” for the MIL case since there is no MIL spec for these filters.
Page 524 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement FM Demod De-Emphasis The De-emphasis setting controls a single-pole filter (6 dB/octave roll off), used to counter intentional pre-emphasis in the transmitter. When the De-emphasis state is OFF the hardware digital filter is bypassed, otherwise the setting is applied. [:SENSe]:SCHart:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis OFF | US25 | US50 | US75 | US750 Remote Command...
Page 525 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement smoothed (smoothing processes include narrow VBWs, trace averaging, and long sweep times with the detector set to Average or Peak). It works best with extreme amounts of smoothing, and with the average detector, with the Average Type set to Power.
Page 526 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor:ADAPtive ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor:ADAPtive? :CORR:NOIS:FLO ON Example First turn NFE on :CORR:NOIS:FLO:ADAP ON Then set it to Adaptive Dependencies Only appears in instruments with the NFE or NF2 license installed. In all others, the control does not appear, however the SCPI command will be accepted without error (but will have no effect) Couplings Sending CORR:NOIS:FLO ON turns NFE Adaptive OFF for backwards compatibility.
Page 527 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement LISN Control This control enables you to select the V-network that is controlled via the AUX IO port. :INPut[1]|2:LISN[:TYPE] FOURphase | ESH2Z5 | ENV216 | OFF Remote Command :INPut[1]|2:LISN[:TYPE]? :INP:LISN FOUR Example Notes FOURPhase and ESH2-Z5 R&S ESH2-Z5 (four phases and protective earth are controllable)
Page 528 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :INPut[1]|2:LISN:PEARth GROunded | FLOating Remote Command :INPut[1]|2:LISN:PEARth? :INP:LISN:PEAR GRO Example Dependencies Only available for ESH2Z5. This control is grayed out when a v-network other than ESH2Z5 is selected. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict;...
Page 529 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Preset Set to off on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" State Saved Saved in instrument state ON|OFF Range Mode IDN Response Displays a drop-down menu that enables you to change the return string of the *IDN? query, which will override the System IDN response.
Page 530 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Global Center Freq The software maintains a Mode Global value called Global Center Freq. When Global Center Freq is switched ON, the current Mode’s center frequency is copied into the Global Center Frequency, and from then on all Modes that support global settings use the Global Center Frequency, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the Center Frequency remains unchanged.
Page 531 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Mode Preset is pressed while Global EMC Std is ON, Global EMC Std is preset to the preset EMC Std of the current Mode. This function resets to when "Restore Defaults" on page 748 is pressed, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed.
Page 532 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :INSTrument:COUPle:DEFault Remote Command :INST:COUP:DEF Example :GLOBal:DEFault Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.3.9 Sweep The Sweep key contains controls for the sweep and measurement functions of the analyzer, such as toggling between Single measure or Continuous measure mode. 3.3.9.1 Sweep/Control This tab accesses controls for operating the Sweep and Control functions of the analyzer.
Page 533 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement Stop/Start Enables you to stop and start a measurement. When stopped, the label on the control changes to Start. [:SENSe]:SCHart:ABORt Remote Command :SCH:ABOR Example :INITiate:IMMediate Remote Command :INITiate:RESTart :INIT:IMM Example :INIT:REST 3.3.9.2 X Scale This tab accesses controls for the X-axis of the analyzer.
Page 534 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision <time> Remote Command :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision? :DISP:SCH:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:X:PDIV 1s Example :DISP:SCH:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:X:PDIV? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. 20 ms 7200 s Strip Chart Max Duration Sets the maximum duration for the Strip Chart to record the data. :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:MAX:DURation <time>...
Page 535 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.3 Strip Chart Measurement 3.3.10.1 Trace Control The controls on the Trace Control tab enable you to select which traces to clear. Select Trace Specifies the selected trace. The “selected trace” is the trace to which other parameters under the Trace menu are applied.
Page 536 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) APD is a real-time gapless power statistical measurement used to specify the power characteristics of signals in communication and microwave systems. The APD measurement shows power statistical data in graphical format and in a signal list. Measurement Commands The following commands and queries can be used to retrieve the measurement results:...
Page 537 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Results Returned be in Single Sweep, or Update=Off when querying trace data from the instrument Returns a series of 1024 points Trace 2 data as a series of x,y pairs Returns a series of 1024 points Trace 3 data as a series of x,y pairs 3.4.1 Views Windows:...
Page 538 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Graph Marker Operation Corresponding Yellow: Series of 1024 floating point numbers for the current measured power Trace APD trace(n=2), namely the Measured trace. Initially all markers refer this trace. Light Blue: Series of 1024 floating point numbers for the current measured power APD trace, namely the Measured 2 trace.
Page 539 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Preset 106.98 dBµV State Saved Saved in instrument state RefLevelMin = -29.31dBuV - ExtGain. RefLevelMax = 153.11 dBµV – External Gain Annotation The reference level is displayed vertically on the right end of the graticule with the title “Ref Level”. Scale/ Div This function enables you to enter a time value to change the horizontal scale.
Page 540 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) keys are grayed out. If an amplitude correction with an Antenna Unit other than None is applied and enabled, and you then turn off that correction or set Apply Corrections to No, the Y Axis Unit that existed before the Antenna Unit was applied is restored.
Page 541 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Autorange When autorange is selected, the attenuation will be increased automatically when an overload is detected. [:SENSe]:APD:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:APD:ATTenuation:AUTO? :APD:ATT:AUTO 0 Example :APD:ATT:AUTO? Preset State Saved...
Page 542 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 543 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) You can tell which attenuator configuration you have by pressing the Attenuation tab, which (in most Modes) opens the Attenuation menu. If the first control in the Attenuation menu says Mech Atten you have the Dual-Attenuator configuration. If the first control says Atten you have the Single-Attenuator configuration.
Page 544 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Preset 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state. 0 dB 50 dB (CXA) 60 dB (EXA) 70 dB (MXA, PXA& N9038A) Annotation The attenuation value will be shown in the meas bar as Atten: <total> dB. :INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation Backwards Compatibility...
Page 545 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) A number of considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation. See "Proper Preselector Operation" on page 545 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter Remote Command :POW:PCEN Example Notes Note that the rules outlined above under the control description apply for the remote command as well as the control.
Page 546 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) µW Presel Adjust Allows you to manually adjust the preselector filter frequency to optimize its response to the signal of interest. This function is only available when "µW Presel Center" on page 690 is available.
Page 547 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Internal Preamp / Internal Preamp (Meters) Accesses a menu of controls for the internal preamps. Turning on the preamp gives a better noise figure, but a poorer inter-modulation distortion (TOI) to noise floor dynamic range.
Page 548 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :POW:GAIN? Dependencies Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the control is not shown. The preamp is not available when the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled. If a POW:GAIN:BAND FULL command is sent when a low band preamp is available, the preamp band parameter is to LOW instead of FULL, and an "Option not installed" ...
Page 549 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) 3.4.4 BW The BW key opens the bandwidth menu, which contains the Resolution BW control. 3.4.4.1 Settings The Settings tab contains the basic Bandwidth functions. It is the only tab under Bandwidth.
Page 550 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) *³30 MHz to <1 GHz 120 kHz ³1 GHz 1 MHz * For Click measurement 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz >30 MHz to <1 GHz 120 kHz When EMC Standard= MIL, Center Frequency <...
Page 551 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Control Path Display Control Type Front Panel Key Initial S/W Revision 3.4.5.1 View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views. Views Windows: "Graph" on page 538, "List"...
Page 552 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) evaluated on a single case. Thus, both of the following forms work: :DISP:VIEW:ADV:SEL "Trace Zoom" :DISP:VIEW:ADV:SEL "TRACE ZOOM" If the specified view is not a valid View, the query returns the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value;...
Page 553 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) This is a front panel function only, there is no remote command available to perform this function. To do this remotely, you must first perform Save Layout as New View, then delete the old User View and rename the new one with the name of the View you just deleted.
Page 554 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) executed. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:DELete:ALL Remote Command :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL:ALL Example Notes Disabled if there are no User Views View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views.
Page 555 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) If you switch measurements with the display disabled (see "Display Enable (Remote Command Only)" on page 706), then query the list of available Views, the result is undefined 3.4.5.2 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement.
Page 556 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Control Annotation Turns on and off the display of values on the Active Function controls for all measurements in the current Mode.
Page 557 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) 2. To reduce emissions from the display, drive circuitry 3. For security purposes If you have turned off the display: – and you are in local operation, the display can be turned back on by pressing any key or by sending :SYSTem:DEFaults MISC :DISPlay:ENABle ON...
Page 558 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Backwards :SYST:PRES no longer turns on :DISPlay:ENABle as it did in legacy analyzers Compatibility Notes 3.4.6 Freq The Freq key opens the Frequency menu, which contains controls that allow you to control the frequency parameters of the instrument.
Page 559 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Freq Incr This control enables you to set the step size for the Frequency parameter. [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? :FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON Example :FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz :FREQ:CENT UP...
Page 560 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Notes Affected Frequency Parameters’ Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526) Preset 0 Hz State Saved Saved in instrument state. -500 GHz 500 GHz Status Bits/OPC Non-overlapped dependencies...
Page 561 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALC:APD:SLIS:REPL 2 Example Replace Signal #2 with Freq Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. If the selected signal is not in the list, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. Freq à...
Page 562 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) On any menu tab for which Select Marker displays, the first control is always Marker Amplitude. Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done. Preset Marker 1 State Saved...
Page 563 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:Y? Remote Command :CALC:APD:MARK11:Y? Example Notes The query returns the marker Y-axis result, if the control mode is Normal, or Delta. If the marker is Off the response is not a number. Preset After a preset, all Markers are turned OFF, so Marker Y Axis Value query will return a not a number (NAN).
Page 564 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Marker Settings Diagram The Marker Settings Diagram lets you configure the Marker system using a visual utility. All Markers Off Turns off all markers. :CALCulate:APD:MARKer:AOFF Remote Command :CALC:APD:MARK:AOFF Example Couple Markers When this function is On, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of every other marker which is not Off. ...
Page 565 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALCulate:APD:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]? :CALC:APD:MARK:COUP ON Example Sets Couple Markers on. Preset Off, presets on Mode Preset and All Markers Off State Saved Saved in instrument state.
Page 566 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Marker Amplitude The Marker Amplitude control is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace. This is the same as the Marker Amplitude control on the Settings tab.
Page 567 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Preset Measured State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Measured| Measured 2| Exceeded Limit Marker Settings Diagram The Marker Settings Diagram lets you configure the Marker system using a visual utility.
Page 568 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) "Normal Marker X Axis Value" on page 568 "Normal Marker Y Axis Value" on page 568 "Delta Marker State" on page 569 "Delta Marker X Axis Value" on page 569 "Delta Marker Y Axis Value"...
Page 569 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Turn on maker 3 in Normal mode and query the Y axis value. Notes This SCPI is alias to :CALC:APD:MARK[1]|2|3|4:MODE POS; :CALC:APD:MARK[1]|2|3|4:Y? Delta Marker State Enables you to toggle the Delta marker state on/off. :CALCulate[1]|2:DELTamarker[1]|2|3|4[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command...
Page 570 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) 3.4.8 Meas Setup The Meas Setup menu panel contains functions for setting up the measurement parameters and also contains functions for setting up parameters global to all measurements in the mode. 3.4.8.1 Settings The Settings tab contains frequently used Meas Setup functions to which you will want the fastest access.
Page 571 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Meas Preset Restores all the measurement parameters to their default values. :CONFigure:APD Remote Command :CONF:APD Example Couplings Selecting Meas Preset will restore all measurement parameters to their default values. 3.4.8.2 Signal List Enables you to access the signal list related functions for Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, Monitor Spectrum and APD measurements.
Page 572 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:SIGNal <integer> Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:MARK:SIGNal <integer> :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:MARK:SIGNal <integer> :CALC:SLIS:MARK:SIGN 4 Example Mark signal #4 :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:SIGN 4 Mark signal #4 :CALC:APD:SLIS:MARK:SIGN 4 Mark signal #4 Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed...
Page 573 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning Annotation The checkbox next to the signal number is unchecked Mark All Marks all signals in the signal list. :CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:ALL Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:MARK:ALL :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:MARK:ALL :CALC:SLIS:MARK:ALL...
Page 574 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Dependencies Only appears in Frequency Scan, Strip Chart and Monitor Spectrum measurements This control is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 575 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:SORT:AUTO? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE FREQ Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE FREQ :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:TYPE FREQ :CALC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE? :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE? :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:TYPE? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? Notes...
Page 576 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Sort By (on SCPI command Notes the control) :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP Det 1 Amptd Sort by the Detector 1 Amplitude column DET1 :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP Det 2 Amptd Sort by the Detector 1 Amplitude column DET2 :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP Det 3 Amptd...
Page 577 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:DAMPlitude ? :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:DAMPlitude ? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP DET2 Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP DET2 :CALC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP? :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:DAMP? Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed Couplings Selecting the detector amplitude type to be sorted (pressing the or sending the equivalent SCPI...
Page 578 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:ORDer ASCending | DESCending Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:ORDer ASCending | DESCending :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:SORT:ORDer ASCending | DESCending :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:ORDer? :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:ORDer? :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:SORT:ORDer? :CALC:SLIS:SORT:ORD DESC Example :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:ORD DESC :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:ORD DESC :CALC:SLIS:SORT:ORD :CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:ORD :CALC:APD:SLIS:SORT:ORD Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List Dependencies...
Page 579 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALC:APD:SLIS:DEL:SIGN 4 Delete signal #4 Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed When signals in the signal list were successfully deleted, an advisory is generated...
Page 580 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Delete Marked Deletes all marked signals in the signal list. If you access this function from the front panel, the following message will prompt you for confirmation to delete the selected signals from the signal list: This will delete the marked signals.
Page 581 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALC:APD:SLIS:DEL:UNM Notes You can send either form of the command, with or without FSCan, from Frequency Scan, Strip Chart, or Monitor Spectrum, and the command will be accepted and obeyed The APD form can only be used from the APD measurement, and only affects the APD Signal List If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed When signals in the signal list were successfully deleted, an advisory is generated...
Page 582 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALC:EMI:SLIS:DEL ALL Example Delete all signals Notes ALL aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:ALL CURRent aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL <int> where integer is the selected signal MARKed aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:MARK UNMarked aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:UNM :CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:DELete ALL | CURRent | MARKed | UNMarked Backwards Compatibility...
Page 583 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :INITiate[1]|2:FMEasurement Backwards Compatibility SCPI Search Method (Remote Command Only) Defines the search method with which maxima are searched for within a scan. :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod SUBRange | PEAK Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod :CALC:PEAK:METH SUBR Example Selects subrange method Notes...
Page 584 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility When this command is sent, # of peaks State will be set to ON, this is equivalent to FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN:STAT ON command :CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:ADD <Numeric Value> Backwards Compatibility SCPI...
Page 585 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Delete Row This is an immediate action function. It will immediately delete the currently- selected row, whether or not that row is being edited. The row following the currently-selected row (or the row preceding if there is none) will be selected. Clear Table Deletes the data from the limit tables.
Page 586 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALC:APD:LLIN:METH:DLEV:PROB N2 Example Specified limit at probability of 10 :CALC:APD:LLIN:METH:DLEV:PROB? Preset State Saved Range N1|N2|N3|N4|N5|N6|N7 Disturbance Level Enables you to define the disturbance level where the Probability limit is applied. :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:METHod:PROBability:DLEVel <ampl>...
Page 587 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Notes There is no readback value on the key. Edit Limit Settings The Edit Limit Settings dialog is the second page of the Edit Limits dialog. You get to it by pressing the Settings control on the Edit Limits dialog. Test Trace Selects the trace that you want the limit to test. ...
Page 588 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALC:APD:LLIN:TEST? Preset On, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range On|Off Annotation If this is on, the active limit window will display the information above regarding pass/fail for each displayed limit.
Page 589 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only) Tests a limit line against its associated APD trace. Returns a 0 if the Disturbance Level (E meas) at the specified Probability or Probability of time (r meas) at the specified Disturbance Level is within the limit, a 1 if the value exceeds either the limit.
Page 590 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Preset Unaffected by Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:DLEVel:CONTrol:POINts? Remote Command :CALC:APD:LLIN:DLEV:CONT:POIN? Example Returns the number of points in the limit line. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Frequency of Probability Limit (Remote Command Only) Defines a list of frequency values for a given probability limit line.
Page 591 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) The points query returns the number of points in the amplitude list. It will not be possible to turn on the limit line unless the number of points in the control matches the number of points in the amplitude.
Page 592 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:PROBability[:DATA] <double> | <double> | … Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:PROBability[:DATA]? :CALC:APD:LLIN:PROB:DATA 0.1,0.01 Example describes the probability values of limit line Preset Limit line data is cleared by Restore Mode Defaults. State Saved Saved in instrument state.
Page 593 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Couplings When the EMC Standard changes to None, the Filter Type is set to Gaussian and the Filter BW is set to -3 dB Choosing a CISPR detector or CISPR presets automatically selects the CISPR Standard, however switching from a CISPR detector has no impact on EMC Standard When the EMC Standard is set to CISPR, the default detector for meter 1 is Peak, meter 2 is Quasi Peak and EMI Average is the default detector for meter 3...
Page 594 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :EMC:STAN MIL Example EMC Std Preset To Enable you to choose which EMC Standard you want to Preset to. [:SENSe]:EMC:STANdard:PRESet NONE | CISPr | MIL Remote Command [:SENSe]:EMC:STANdard:PRESet? :EMC:STAN:PRES MIL Example Dependencies For model N9048B with option WF1, only CISPr|MIL are available.
Page 595 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) [:SENSe]:APD:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis OFF | US25 | US50 | US75 | US750 Remote Command [:SENSe]:APD:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis? :APD:DEM:FM:DEEM US75 Example :APD:DEM:FM:DEEM? Notes Only available in FM. Grayed out for AM and PM. Preset US75 State Saved Saved in instrument state Range...
Page 596 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) In those cases where the cancellation is ineffective, it nonetheless has no undesirable side-effects. There is no significant speed impact to having Noise Floor Extension on. The best accuracy is achieved when substantial smoothing occurs in each point before trace averaging.
Page 597 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) First turn NFE on :CORR:NOIS:FLO:ADAP ON Then set it to Adaptive Dependencies Only appears in instruments with the NFE or NF2 license installed. In all others, the control does not appear, however the SCPI command will be accepted without error (but will have no effect) Couplings Sending CORR:NOIS:FLO ON turns NFE Adaptive OFF for backwards compatibility.
Page 598 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) LISN Control This control enables you to select the V-network that is controlled via the AUX IO port. :INPut[1]|2:LISN[:TYPE] FOURphase | ESH2Z5 | ENV216 | OFF Remote Command :INPut[1]|2:LISN[:TYPE]? :INP:LISN FOUR Example Notes FOURPhase and ESH2-Z5...
Page 599 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :INPut[1]|2:LISN:PEARth GROunded | FLOating Remote Command :INPut[1]|2:LISN:PEARth? :INP:LISN:PEAR GRO Example Dependencies Only available for ESH2Z5. This control is grayed out when a v-network other than ESH2Z5 is selected. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict;...
Page 600 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Preset Set to off on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" State Saved Saved in instrument state ON|OFF Range Mode IDN Response Displays a drop-down menu that enables you to change the return string of the *IDN? query, which will override the System IDN response.
Page 601 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Global Center Freq The software maintains a Mode Global value called Global Center Freq. When Global Center Freq is switched ON, the current Mode’s center frequency is copied into the Global Center Frequency, and from then on all Modes that support global settings use the Global Center Frequency, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the Center Frequency remains unchanged.
Page 602 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Mode Preset is pressed while Global EMC Std is ON, Global EMC Std is preset to the preset EMC Std of the current Mode. This function resets to when "Restore Defaults" on page 748 is pressed, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed.
Page 603 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :INSTrument:COUPle:DEFault Remote Command :INST:COUP:DEF Example :GLOBal:DEFault Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.4.9 Sweep The Sweep key contains controls that allow you to control the sweep and measurement functions of the analyzer, such as whether in Single measure or Continuous measure mode.
Page 604 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) Compatibility Notes Restart The Restart function restarts the current sweep, or measurement. The Restart function is accessed in several ways: 1. Pressing the Restart key2. Sending the remote command INIT:IMMediate3. Sending the remote command INIT:RESTart :INITiate[:IMMediate] Remote...
Page 605 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :INIT:RES Dependencies Pause is not available when the automated APD measurement is not running. Resume is not available when the automated APD measurement is not running. Couplings When paused, the label on the key changes to “Resume”. When resumed, the label on the key changes to “Pause”.
Page 606 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) limit, the corresponded E meas for a given probability r limit or r meas for a given E limit will be updated onto the signal list. If the point does not exist on the APD trace, the interpolated value will be updated.
Page 607 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) If the analyzer is set for Continuous measurement, it sets up the measurement and initiates a new data measurement sequence with a new data acquisition (sweep) taken once the trigger condition is met. If the analyzer is set for Single measurement, it remains in the "idle"...
Page 608 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) View/Blank This control lets you set the state of the two trace variables, Update and Display. Notes The four states of this 1-of-N actually set two variables, Update and Display, to their four possible combinations: Active: Update and Display both On View: Update Off and Display On...
Page 609 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.4 Amplitude Probability Distribution Measurement (APD) :TRACe[1]|2|3:APD:DISPlay[:STATe] ON | OFF | 0 | 1 Remote Command :TRACe[1]|2|3:APD:DISPlay[:STATe]? :TRAC2:APD:DISP,1 Example Makes trace 2 visible :TRAC3:APD:DISP,0 Blanks trace 3 Couplings Whenever you set Update to On for any trace, the Display is set to On for that trace. Preset 1|0|0 (On for Trace 1;...
Page 610 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) This measurement is used for an automatic assessment of the amplitude, rate and duration of disturbances and is commonly used for household appliances in electromagnetic compatibility tests. It has Peak and Quasi Peak detector traces. The trace’s measured values are gapless with 500 ms resolution time.
Page 611 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Remote Query Results For the FETCh, MEAS READ queries above, the results returned depend on follows: Return Values Not specified Returns a comma-separated list containing detailed information in the following format: or 1 –...
Page 612 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Return Values – Click > L ( Percent ) – L – L – Counted Continuous Disturbance – Total Time of Continuous Disturbance – Exception Rule Used : 600ms Combination – Exception Rule Used : Separation of Click < 200ms –...
Page 613 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Return Values Similar to n = 2, but uses a separate number to maintain backwards compatibility Returns a comma-separated list containing detailed information in the following format: – Number of disturbances in the following list (integer) [Repeat the following for each disturbance] –...
Page 614 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Return Values – Click > L – Click > L ( Percent ) – L – L – Counted Continuous Disturbance – Total Time of Continuous Disturbance – Exception Rule Used : 600ms Combination –...
Page 615 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) than 200 ms A series of short pulses are treated as a click when its duration, measured from the start of the first to the end of the last pulse, is not longer than 200 ms and conditions 1) and 3) are fulfilled.
Page 616 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Click Measurement Click duration and QP amplitude are measured with the following methods: 1. The start time of a duration for a disturbance is when the Peak amplitude rises above the quasi-peak limit of a continuous disturbance 2.
Page 617 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Click Rate Click Rate is the average number of clicks per minute. Click Rate (N) is determined from the formula: N = n / T, where n is the number of measured clicks during the minimum observation time T in minutes.
Page 618 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Click Count The test is stopped when the measured Click is equal to or more than the entered Click Count number. Click Rate Analysis The flow diagram below is the commonly used interpretation procedure for test results.
Page 619 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 620 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 621 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Combination of disturbances in a time frame less than 600 ms There is an update on the CISPR 14-1 document on the clause 4.3.2.2 that allows one series of discontinuous disturbances within a time frame less than 600 ms, having amplitudes that exceed the limits for continuous disturbances and that do not meet the definition of click, to be considered as one click.
Page 622 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Normal view is displayed automatically when the “Start” control is pressed to start a new measurement. 3.5.1.2 Meas Results In the Meas Results View, a table showing the measurement result is displayed. The view switches automatically from Normal View to Meas Results when the measurement completes, but a control is also provided in the Display, View menu to enable you to switch to the Meas results.
Page 623 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) 3.5.1.3 Click Density The Click Density View shows an overview of the clicks and continuous disturbance that have occurred over the course of the measurement. In the Density window, each cell in the table is selectable. When a cell is selected, the Filtered Disturbance List shows only the disturbances that occurred on the channel and the time period selected.
Page 624 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) 3.5.2 Windows There are 4 Windows, which are Graph, Metrics, Disturbance List and Meas Result. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 625 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Graph The graph window has a yellow trace that is the current measured power using the Peak Detector, and a light blue trace that is the current measured power using the Quasi Peak Detector.
Page 626 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> Remote Command :DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? :DISP:DAN:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 80 dBuV Example :DISP:DAN:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV? Couplings Ref level is always auto coupled to limit so that the limit line is always in the center of graph. Preset 106.99 dBuV State Saved...
Page 627 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :DISP:DAN:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS 12.7 Example :DISP:DAN:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS? Sets the Ref Level Offset to 12.7 dB. The only valid suffix is dB. If no suffix is sent, dB will be assumed. :DISP:DAN:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS:STAT ON Turns the Ref Level Offset On Preset 0 dBm State Saved...
Page 628 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW:DISTurbance:ILINe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW:DISTurbance:ILINe? :DISP:DAN:VIEW:DIST:ILIN 1 Example :DISP:DAN:VIEW:DIST:ILIN? Dependencies The Disturbance Indicator Line will only be shown when the measurement is not running. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Graph Channel...
Page 629 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) overview (Click Density). The view switches automatically from Normal View to Meas Results when the measurement duration completes and vice versa when the user starts a new measurement. :DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW[:SELect] NORMal | MRESults | CDENsity Remote Command :DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW[:SELect]?
Page 630 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) SCPI is retained for backwards compatibility, but it only supports predefined views Restore Layout to Default Restores the Layout to the default for Basic. Modified Views are very temporary; if you exit the current measurement they are discarded, and they are not saved in State.
Page 631 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName <alphanumeric> Remote Command :DISP:VIEW:ADV:REN “Baseband” Example Notes <alphanumeric> is case insensitive; you can specify mixed case, however the name will be evaluated on a single case If the <alphanumeric> specifying the new name is already present in the list of View names, the error message “-224, Illegal parameter value;...
Page 632 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views. The legacy :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for nodes,...
Page 633 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) 3.5.5.3 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement. Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode. Also turns the graticule Y-Axis annotation on and off.
Page 634 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Trace Annotation Turns on and off the labels on the traces, showing their detector (or their Math Mode) as described in the Trace section, for all windows in all measurements in the current Mode for which Trace Annotation on/off is supported.
Page 635 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :DISP:ANN:MBAR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Display Enable (Remote Command Only) Turns the display on/off, including the display drive circuitry.
Page 636 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Name Command :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Delete All But This Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:CREate Add Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:REName Rename Screen :SYSTem:SEQuencer Sequencer On/Off :DISPlay:ENABle OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:ENABle? :DISP:ENAB OFF Example :DISP:ENAB OFF :DISP:ENAB ON turns Backlight ON, but changing...
Page 637 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) only applies to the currently selected channel. If Manual Freq is chosen, the Manual Frequency control appears, and enables you to specify the frequency yourself. [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CHANnel[1]|2|...|5:FREQuency F150KHZ | F500KHZ | F1400KHZ Remote Command | F30MHZ | MANual [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CHANnel[1]|2|...|5:FREQuency?
Page 638 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) the SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict; Option not available” warning. If the instrument does not have option WF1, a “ –241, Hardware missing; Option not installed” warning is generated.
Page 639 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) 3.5.7.2 Settings The controls on the Settings tab include the Marker active function and a radio button selection of the marker control mode (Normal, Delta or Off) for the selected marker, as well as additional functions that help you use markers. Marker Time In the Disturbance Analyzer measurement, the Marker X Axis value is expressed in time units as the trace is in the time domain.
Page 640 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Normal and Delta markers are indicated by a diamond shaped outline. The Preset control mode in the Disturbance Analyzer measurement is off for all markers. The functions in this menu include a 1-of-N selection of the control mode Normal, Delta or Off for the selected marker.
Page 641 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) – X Axis scale: Auto – Band Span: 0 Auto Trace: On Off does not affect which marker is selected. Delta Marker (Reset Delta) Pressing this control is exactly the same as pressing the “Delta” selection on the Marker Mode radio button.
Page 642 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer:AOFF Remote Command :CALC:DAN:MARK:AOFF Example Couplings Sets the selected marker to 1. Couple Markers When this function is invoked, moving any marker causes an “equal X Axis movement” of every other marker that is active. By “equal X Axis movement” we mean that the difference between each marker’s X Axis value (in the fundamental x- axis units of the trace that marker is on) is preserved, as is the X Axis value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental X-axis units).
Page 643 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Peak Search Places the selected marker on the trace point with the maximum y-axis value for that marker’s trace. If the selected marker was off, then it is turned on as a normal marker and a peak search is performed.
Page 644 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Relative To Enables you to select the reference marker for a marker in Delta mode. :CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence <integer> Remote Command :CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence? :CALC:DAN:MARK5:REF 1 Example :CALC:DAN:MARK5:REF? Notes A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out, and if sent from SCPI, generates error -221: ...
Page 645 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Marker Settings Diagram Refer to Marker Settings Diagram in Settings Tab. 3.5.7.5 Marker Function Accesses a menu of controls that enables you to do marker zoom related functions. Marker Time Refer to Marker Time in Settings Tab.
Page 646 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:FUNCtion:ZOOM:OUT Remote Command :CALC:DAN:MARK1:FUNC:ZOOM:OUT Example Dependencies Marker Zoom Out control is not available if the Marker Zoom has not been executed Couplings The Ref Value and Scale/Div will be changed to accommodate the new span when disturbance zoom is executed.
Page 647 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Notes Front panel only. 3.5.8.1 Settings The Settings tab enables you to configure basic settings. Pause This control is the same as the one in Sweep control. See "Pause / Resume" on page 673.
Page 648 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Attenuation Enables you to set the value of the Attenuation parameter. This control only affects the Mechanical Attenuator. The following amplitude parameters are not settableby the user and therefore do not appear in any menus: Elec Attenuator Disabled Elec Attenuation...
Page 649 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Full Range Atten Specifies the value of full range attenuator when RF input and RF Input Port 2 is selected in the N9041B only. This is the same as the Full Range Atten on the Attenuation tab under Amplitude in the Mode Common.
Page 650 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:DURation:HOURs? :DAN:DUR:HOUR 1 Example :DAN:DUR:HOUR? Dependencies This control is grayed out when measurement is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 651 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Click Count When turned on, specifies the Click Count value for the test to stop when the measured clicks is equal to or more than the entered clicks limit number. [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CLICk:COUNt <integer>...
Page 652 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Type. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 653 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :DAN:CHAN? Dependencies Channels 2,3,4 and 5 are only applicable with option 4CK, else an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict;...
Page 654 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) If the model number is not N9048B, a “ –241, Hardware missing; not available for this model number” warning is generated. . Preset 66|56|56|60|56 ON|ON|ON|ON|ON State Saved Saved in instrument state Saved in instrument state 6.99 dBuV 156.99 dBuV...
Page 655 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Backwards The sent SCPI only affects Channel 1. Compatibility Notes Click Rate (User Defined) Specifies the Click Rate for the L value. This control only appears if Click Rate is set to User Defined.
Page 656 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Dependencies Channels 2,3,4 and 5 are only applicable with option 4CK, else an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict;...
Page 657 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Upper Quartile Method Specifies the interpretation choice of CISPR 14-1’s Upper Quartile Method for evaluating clicks. The number of clicks at 1.4 MHz and 30 MHz exceeding Lq are allowed to be one quarter the number of clicks counted at either their respective frequencies or 500kHz.
Page 658 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :CALCulate:DANalyzer:CHANnel[1]|2|...|5:LIMit <amptd> Remote Command :CALCulate:DANalyzer:CHANnel[1]|2|...|5:LIMit? CALCulate:DANalyzer:CHANnel[1]|2|3|4|5:LIMit:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0 CALCulate:DANalyzer:CHANnel[1]|2|3|4|5:LIMit:AUTO? :CALC:DAN:CHAN:LIM 50 dBuV Example :CALC:DAN:CHAN:LIM? :CALC:DAN:CHAN:LIM:AUTO OFF Dependencies Channels 2,3,4 and 5 are only applicable with option 4CK, else an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict;...
Page 659 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Selected Disturbance Specifies the selected disturbance. Notes Front panel only. When select disturbance is the active function, press UP to go up in the disturbance list, and press DOWN to go down in the list. Dependencies Couplings When the disturbance list is cleared, this value will reset to 0.
Page 660 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :CALC:DAN:DLIS:SORT:TYPE TDIS :CALC:DAN:DLIS:SORT:TYPE TIME :CALC:DAN:DLIS:SORT:TYPE FREQ :CALC:DAN:DLIS:SORT:TYPE? :CALC:DAN:DLIS:SORT:AUTO 1 Turn on auto sorting :CALC:DAN:DLIS:SORT:AUTO? Notes If Auto is turned On, the disturbance list is sorted based on the sorting order and sorting type as selected.
Page 661 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :CALC:DAN:DLIS:SORT:ORD? Dependencies Selecting the sort order (pressing the control or sending the equivalent SCPI command) will turn on the Auto Sort state, even if that sort order was already selected. Preset ASCending State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 662 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Comment (Remote Command Only) Sets an ASCII comment field for each disturbance in list, which will be shown in the “Comment” column of the disturbance list. This value will be stored in the disturbance list exported file.
Page 663 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) EMC Standard Accesses a menu that allows you to select None (no EMI standard), CISPR (CISPR 16-1-1), and MIL (MIL-461A). Each standard has a unique way of determining the couplings between detectors and RBWs, as well as its own set of available RBW’s. The Filter Type is always Gaussian in the EMI Receiver Mode.
Page 664 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) CISPR When the EMC Standard is set to CISPR, all auto-selected Res Bandwidths are one of the four CISPR bandwidths: 200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz, and 1 MHz. The Res BW can also be selected manually. For this purpose, a set of Impulse bandwidths in a 1–3–10 sequence is provided to fill in the gaps between the compliant bandwidths.
Page 665 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Noise Floor Extension Allows you to turn on the Noise Floor Extension function in either of two states, Full or Adaptive. In Full NFE, the expected noise power of the analyzer (derived from a factory calibration) is subtracted from the trace data.
Page 666 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) With the introduction of Adaptive NFE, the menu control is changed from On|Off to Full|Adaptive|Off. For SCPI Backwards Compatibility, the existing SCPI command to turn NFE on and off is retained, and a new command is added to set the state to turn Adaptive On and Off [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor ON|OFF|1|0 is retained, default changed...
Page 667 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) [:SENSe]:METer:ATTenuation:PROTection ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:METer:ATTenuation:PROTection? :MET:ATT:PROT ON Example :MET:ATT:PROT? Couplings When ON, an attenuation of at least 10 dB is always set on the input when autorange is running during a meters measurement, prescan, and the final measurement Preset State Saved...
Page 668 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) ESH2-Z5 Phase Enables you to select the phase of the V-network that is used when the ESH2-Z5 V- network is used. The V-network is controlled via the AUX IO port. :INPut[1]|2:LISN:PHASe L1 | L2 | L3 | N Remote Command :INPut[1]|2:LISN:PHASe? :INP:LISN:PHAS L1...
Page 669 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :INP:LISN:PHAS N Example :INP:LISN:PHAS L1 Couplings The same selection of phase is used for both the ESH2-Z5 and the ENV216. If L2 or L3 is chosen for the ESH2-Z5, the ENV216 selection is blanked, and when you switch back to the ENV216, the N selection will be chosen for both the ESH2-Z5 and the ENV216 Preset Set to...
Page 670 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Mode IDN Freq Option of CXA, MXA, EXA, PXA and <Model> field of *IDN Response string R&S ESU 503, 507, 508, 513 ESU-8 ESU-26 ESU-40 R&S ESL ESL-3 507, 508, 513, 526, 550 ESL-6 R&S ESR ESR-3...
Page 671 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) This function resets to when "Restore Defaults" on page 748 is pressed, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed. :INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer ALL | NONE Remote Command :INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer? :INST:COUP:FREQ:CENT ALL Example :INST:COUP:FREQ:CENT? Preset Set to...
Page 672 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Global Limit Lines, so you can switch between any of these Modes and the Limit Lines remain unchanged. Adjusting the Limit Lines of any Mode that supports Global Settings, while Global Limit Lines is ALL, modifies the Global Limit Lines.
Page 673 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Pause / Resume Enables you to pause and resume a measurement. When a measurement is paused, the label of the control changes to Resume. Press Resume to resume the measurement. :INITiate:PAUSe Remote Command :INIT:PAUS...
Page 674 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) :INITiate:DANalyzer:SDISturbance Remote Command :INIT:DAN:SDIS Example Dependencies This control is grayed out when a measurement is running. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...
Page 675 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) Scale/Div Specifies the Scale/Div value of the graph used to configure the X-axis display range. :DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision <time> Remote Command :DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision? :DISP:DAN:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:X:PDIV 1s Example :DISP:DAN:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:X:PDIV? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state 20 ms 720 s Full Scale...
Page 676 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) The trace result returned is in this structure: point: set to 1 if it is the last segment of partial data, else set to 0. point: number n of the transmitted result for a trace (n depends on the partial trace point set, if it is the last segment of partial data, n could be a value less than partial trace point set).
Page 677 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) “–221, Settings conflict; Option not available” warning is generated. If the instrument does not have option WF1, a “ –241, Hardware missing; Option not installed” warning is generated. . If the model number is not N9048B, a “ –241, Hardware missing; not available for this model number” warning is generated.
Page 678 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.5 Disturbance Analyzer Measurement (DAN) point and above: Peak trace data. If the SPCI is sent while sweeping is running, the data will only be returned when the number of available point matches the partial trace length set by user, or the sweeping ends. Once all the available data has been returned or if the channel is turned off, sending this SPCI returns 0,0, which means non-last segment and trace point of 0.
Page 679 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan 3.6 Real Time Scan The Real Time Scan measurement provides real-time results of the spectrum at the receiver input by limiting the measurement to a single FFT acquisition. It sets the LO to a fixed frequency, captures data and performs Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT) simultaneously.
Page 680 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Results Returned instrument. The X-axis values are the values of the trace in the x-axis scale units of seconds Returns Trace 2 Time Domain data as a list of x,y pairs. The Y-values are in the current Y Axis Unit of the instrument.
Page 681 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Spectrogram|Time Domain 3.6.1.1 Spectrogram Windows: "Spectrum" on page 681, "Waterfall" on page 682 Dual window view of the Spectrum and Waterfall result. :DISP:RTSC:VIEW SPEC Example 3.6.1.2 Time Domain Windows: ...
Page 682 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan At the top of the spectrum graph, there is an input overload indicator. If an input overload occurs, the indicator appears on the display. Otherwise, the indicator is invisible. When user changes the Display Trace (timeslice), the indicator will be updated accordingly.
Page 683 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan 3.6.3.1 Y Scale The Y Scale tab accesses a menu that enables you to set the desired vertical scale and associated settings. Ref Value Sets the reference value of the Spectrum and Time Domain windows. :DISPlay:RTSCan:VIEW:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real>...
Page 684 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :UNIT:POWer DBM | DBMV | DBMA | V | W | A | DBUV | DBUA | DBPW | DBMV_MHZ | Remote Command DBMA_MHZ | DBUV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBPW_MHZ | :UNIT:POWer? :UNIT:POW dBmV Example :UNIT:POW?
Page 685 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 686 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Configuration 2: Mechanical attenuator, no optional electronic attenuator Note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator Option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual-Attenuator”...
Page 687 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan (Note that depending on the measurement, there may be no Auto/Man functionality on the Mech Atten control.) In the Single-Attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage has only two states. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, both stages have significant range, so you are given separate control of the mechanical and electronic attenuator stages.
Page 688 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan – In N9041B, if the RF Input Port is RF Input 2, use the formula above and subtract the value of Full Range Atten from the result to determine the Mech Atten. Limit the value so that it is never lower than 0 dB and so that total attenuation, including Full Range Atten, is never less than 6 dB (total attenuation, including Full Range Atten below 6 dB, can never be chosen by Auto) In External Mixing and BBIQ, where the attenuator is not in the signal path, the attenuator setting...
Page 689 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO? Example Turn Auto Mech AttenON: :POW:ATT:AUTO ON Dependencies :POW:ATT:AUTO is only available in measurements that support Auto, such as Swept SA Preset Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man As described under...
Page 690 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Mech Atten also appears with no switch, as above, in configurations that include an Electronic Attenuator but when the Electronic Attenuator is enabled. 3.6.3.3 Signal Path Contains controls that pertain to the routing of the signal through the frontend of the instrument.
Page 691 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Blank in models that do not include a microwave preselector, such as option 503. If the SCPI is sent in these instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0. Couplings The active marker position determines where the centering will be attempted.
Page 692 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust? :POW:PADJ 100KHz Example :POW:PADJ? Notes The value on the control reads out to 0.1 MHz resolution. Dependencies Grayed out if microwave preselector is off. Grayed out if entirely in Band 0. (NOTE: To use the preselector in the overlap between Band 0 and Band 1, the instrument can be band-locked to Band 1.
Page 693 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan ,for a preamp with a 9 kHz lowest specified frequency: "Preamp: Accy unspec’d below 9 kHz". For the Frequency Scan measurement, this control only affects the Preamp setting used for meters, and is labelled Internal Preamp (Meters). Examples Selection Example...
Page 694 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan LNA / LNA (Meters) This control lets you turn the Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) on and off. The LNA is an additional preamplifier which provides superior DANL and frequency range compared to the Internal Preamp. The LNA provides lower system noise figure, especially at frequencies above 100 MHz, and can be operated up to the full range of 50 GHz analyzers.
Page 695 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan CISPR : 10, 30, 100, 200, 300, 1k, 3k, 9k, 30k, 120k, 300k, 1M MIL : 1, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300k, 1M [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth? :BAND 1kHz Example...
Page 696 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :DISPlay:RTSCan:WINDow:TRACe:POSition:AUTO[:STATe]? :DISP:RTSC:WIND:TRAC:POS 146 Example Set Display Trace to 146 for the Waterfall window Notes When in Auto, the Display Trace is automatically coupled to the latest time slice number. Whenever the measurement restarts, the Display Trace State will be reset to Auto. This ensures the latest time slice is shown during the measurement until you change the Display Trace.
Page 697 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :DISPlay:RTSCan:WINDow:TRACe:COUPle ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:RTSCan:WINDow:TRACe:COUPle? :DISP:RTSC:WIND:TRAC:COUP ON Example Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Time Domain Freq Sets the frequency of the Time Domain spectrum. This is the frequency that the signal data extracts from the Spectrogram timeslices and aggregates to form the Time Domain trace.
Page 698 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Waterfall Trace Determines which one of the traces is displayed in the Waterfall window. :DISPlay:RTSCan:WINDow:WATerfall:TRACe TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 Remote Command :DISPlay:RTSCan:WINDow:WATerfall:TRACe? :DISP:RTSC:WIND:WAT:TRAC TRAC2 Example :DISP:RTSC:WIND:WAT:TRAC? Preset TRACe1 State Saved Yes, Saved in instrument state. Range Trace1|Trace2|Trace3 Start Time Line...
Page 699 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state 0, but the next decrement takes you to 359 359.9, but the next increment takes you back to 0 Reference Hue Position This control enables you to adjust where, as a percentage of the graticule, the Ref Hue appears.
Page 700 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Auto Adjust Hue Positions Sets the Highest Density View to the value of the highest density value found in the current density bitmap and sets the Lowest Density View to the lowest non-zero density value.
Page 701 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan User View Lets you choose a View from the saved User Views for the current measurement. This panel only appears if a User View exists for the current measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect <alphanumeric> Remote Command :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect? Example...
Page 702 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Save Layout as New View Saves your new View as a User View. An alpha keyboard appears, which lets you name your new View; the default is the old View name plus a number. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:NAME <alphanumeric>...
Page 703 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Delete User View You can delete the current View if it is a User View. The default view becomes the current view for the Measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:DELete Remote Command :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL Example Notes <alphanumeric> is case insensitive;...
Page 704 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :DISP:VIEW:ADV:CAT? Example Notes Returns a quoted string of the available Views for the current measurement, separated by commas. The list includes names for all the Views, including User Views, available for the current Measurement Example: "Normal,Trace Zoom,Spectrogram,Baseband,myView1,yourView1"...
Page 705 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Backwards Compatibility :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]? SCPI This command is accepted for backwards compatibility with older instruments, but the WINDow, TRACe GRID parameters are ignored...
Page 706 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :DISP:ANN:TRAC OFF Example Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Control Annotation Turns on and off the display of values on the Active Function controls for all measurements in the current Mode. This is a security feature. :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe]?
Page 707 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan 2. To reduce emissions from the display, drive circuitry 3. For security purposes If you have turned off the display: – and you are in local operation, the display can be turned back on by pressing any key or by sending :SYSTem:DEFaults MISC :DISPlay:ENABle ON...
Page 708 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Backwards :SYST:PRES no longer turns on :DISPlay:ENABle as it did in legacy analyzers Compatibility Notes 3.6.6 Freq The Freq key opens the Frequency menu, which contains controls that enable you to control the Frequency parameters of the instrument. Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements in the current Mode –...
Page 709 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan [:SENSe]:RTSCan:FREQuency:SPAN <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:RTSCan:FREQuency:SPAN? :FREQ:SPAN 500 MHz Example Couplings If the span set exceeds the range of the existing FFT acquisition, it will be clipped to fit into the FFT acquisition. You can query the acquisition boundary through SCPI.
Page 710 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan [:SENSe]:RTSCan:FREQuency:STOP <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:RTSCan:FREQuency:STOP? :FREQ:STOP 500 MHz Example Couplings If the stop frequency set falls into another FFT acquisition, the start frequency will be coupled to the new FFT acquisition’s start boundary. You can query the acquisition boundary through SCPI.
Page 711 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan The maximum frequency of the instrument. (that is, a 27 GHz max freq instrument has a CF step range of +/- 27 GHz) Status Bits/OPC non-overlapped dependencies Frequency Offset Enables you to set a frequency offset value to account for frequency conversions outside of the analyzer.
Page 712 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan of exported trace data, queried trace data, markers, trace data used in calculations such as N dB points, trace math, etc., are all affected by Freq Offset. Changing the offset, even on a trace that is not updating will immediately change all of the above, without taking new data needing to be taken.
Page 713 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan 3.6.7.1 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected when you change marker settings, perform a Peak Search, etc. The Select Marker control appears above the menu panel, indicating that it applies to all controls in the Marker menu panels.
Page 714 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Marker X Axis Position (Remote Command Only) Sets the marker X Axis Scale position in trace points. This setting has no effect if the control mode is Off, but is the SCPI equivalent of entering a value if the control mode is Normal or Delta - except in trace points rather than X Axis Scale units.
Page 715 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :CALCulate:RTSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:Z? Remote Command :CALC:RTSC:MARK2:Z? Example Notes The query returns the marker’s absolute Z Axis value if the control mode is Normal. It returns the offset from the marker’s reference marker if the control mode is Delta. Preset 9.91E+37 Marker Z...
Page 716 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :CALCulate:RTSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MODE POSition | DELTa | OFF Remote Command :CALCulate:RTSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MODE? :CALC:RTSC:MARK1:MODE POS Example :CALC:RTSC:MARK1:MODE? Notes This command (not the query) causes the specified marker to become selected. Couplings Whenever the marker turns on (Normal or Delta) from an off state, it appear in the currently ACTIVE window and gets linked to the TRACE in that window.
Page 717 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :CALCulate:RTSCan:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :CALCulate:RTSCan:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe]? :CALC:RTSC:MARK:TABL ON Example turns on the marker table :CALC:RTSC:MARK:TABL? Dependencies Only available as a switch in the Spectrogram View. Marker Table is also available as a selection in the Window Data dropdown in all Views Preset State Saved...
Page 718 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Couple Markers When this function is on, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of every other marker in the same window that is not Off. By “equal X Axis movement” we mean that we preserve the difference between each marker’s X Axis value (in the fundamental x-axis units of the trace that marker is on) and the X Axis value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental x-axis units).
Page 719 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan message is generated. If the equivalent remote command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. State Saved Next Peak Moves the selected marker to the peak that has the next highest amplitude less than the current marker value.
Page 720 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Minimum Peak Moves the selected marker to the minimum y-axis value on the current trace. If the selected marker is off, it is turned on before the minimum search is performed. :CALCulate:RTSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MINimum Remote Command :CALC:RTSC:MARK:MIN Example...
Page 721 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :CALCulate:RTSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 | MHOLd1 Remote | MHOLd2 | MHOLd3 | TDOMain1 | TDOMain2 | TDOMain3 Command :CALCulate:RTSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe? :CALC:RTSC:MARK3:TRAC TRAC3 Example :CALC:RTSC:MARK:TRAC? Couplings Whenever the marker turns on (Normal or Delta) from an off state markers, it appear in the currently ACTIVE window and get linked to the TRACE in that window.
Page 722 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Notes Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker If specified marker is off, this command will turn it on at the center of the screen as a normal type marker. Dependencies This function is not available on time domain traces. If the grayed out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 723 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan If the specified marker is off, this command will turn it on at the center of the screen on the current Display Trace in the currently selected Waterfall window Dependencies This function is not available on time domain traces. If the grayed-out control is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
Page 724 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan State Saved Saved in instrument state 12000 Annotation Appears in the measurement bar at the top of the display. The annotation appears in the format n/N where n is the hold count and N is the hold number. Accelerate TDS (30M –...
Page 725 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Meas Preset This control returns the Meas Local variables in the Real Time Scan measurement to their preset values. This is the same as sending the SCPI command CONF:SCAN. 3.6.8.2 Limits The Limits tab contains controls for Limit Lines. Limits arrays can be entered by the user, sent over SCPI, or loaded from a file.
Page 726 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:DISPlay ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:DISPlay? :CALC:LLIN2:DISP ON Example :CALC:LLIN2:DISP? Couplings Limit display ON selects the limit. Testing is done on all displayed limits if Test Limits (All Limits) is ON. Entering the limit menu from the GUI turns on the selected limit.
Page 727 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan -40 dB 0 dB Trace The Trace column selects the trace that you want the limit to test. A limit can be applied to multiple traces. A trace can have multiple limit lines simultaneously; in that case, only one upper limit line will affect the color of the trace.
Page 728 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Select Limit Specifies the selected limit. The term “selected limit” is used throughout this document to specify which limit will be affected by the functions. Notes The selected limit is remembered even when not in the Limit Menu. Preset Limit 1, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
Page 729 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan message is generated.“-221. Settings conflict; Start or Stop Freq out of range for current input settings” X Offset Offsets the limit trace by some specified frequency. :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:X <freq> Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:X? :CALC:LLIN:OFFS:X -50MHZ Example Sets the X axis offset to -50 MHz.
Page 730: When This Control Is Pressed A Prompt Is Placed On The Screen That Says "Please
3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan For example, if the X offset is –10 MHz and the Y offset is 1 dB, the values in the limit table will be updated as follows: 10 MHz will be subtracted from each X value, 1 dB will be added to each Y value.
Page 731 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Amplitude Enables you to edit the Amplitude of the current row. –1000 dBm 1000 dBm Limit Graph The Limit Graph embedded in the Edit Limit dialog lets you edit the limit line visually. Each node in the limit line is represented by a gray circle.
Page 732 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Select Limit Specifies the selected limit. The term “selected limit” is used throughout this document to specify which limit will be affected by the functions. Notes The selected limit is remembered even when not in the Limit Menu. Preset Limit 1, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults.
Page 733 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan For linear amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: For log amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: Note that Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between points in the limit table.
Page 734 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan if the center frequency changes to 2 GHz, the limit line segment will be displayed at CF + 300 MHz, or 2.3 GHz. It is possible to change this setting after a limit line has been entered. When changing from On to Off or vice-versa, the frequency values in the limit line table change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current frequency settings of the analyzer.
Page 735 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan the limit line segment at RL – 20 dB, or –30 dBm. Furthermore, if the reference level amplitude changes to –30 dBm, the limit line segment will be displayed at RL – 20 dB, or –50 dBm.
Page 736 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan When taking a trace in order to build a limit, it will often work well to take the trace with a resolution bandwidth wider than the expected measurement, a video bandwidth lower than the expected measurement, and with the detector set to Max Hold or Min Hold.
Page 737 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Test Limits Selects whether displayed traces are tested against displayed limits (i.e. those for which Limit On/Off is set to On). For each displayed trace for which a Limit is turned on, a message will be displayed in the upper-left corner of the graticule to notify whether the trace passes or fails the limits.
Page 738: Press Enter Or Ok To Delete All Limits. Press Esc Or Cancel To Close This Dialog." The Deletion Is Only Performed If You Press Ok Or Enter; If So, After The Deletion, The
3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Delete All Limits Deletes all limit lines. All limit data will be cleared and returned to factory preset settings. When this control is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK to delete all limits. ...
Page 739 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Only applies to limits that are turned on, if a Limit is off it will not be tested. If a Trace is not displaying it will still be tested, and if Test Limits (All Limits) is off the Trace will still be tested.
Page 740 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan An empty array returns the system error “list is empty” to a data query, 0 to a POINts query. :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:CONTrol[:DATA] <x>, <x>, … Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:CONTrol[:DATA] :CALC:LLIN:CONT 1GHz,2GHz,2GHz,3GHz Example Describes the X values of a stair-stepped limit line. :CALC:LLIN:CONT? Preset Limit line data is cleared by Restore Mode Defaults.
Page 741 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Limit Amplitude Points Returns the number of points in the amplitude list of a limit line. It should match the number of limit line frequency points. If one array is larger than the other, the limit trace is built using only as much data as is contained in the smaller array.
Page 742 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan switching from a CISPR detector has no impact on EMC Standard When the EMC Standard is set to CISPR, the default detector for meter 1 is Peak, meter 2 is Quasi Peak and EMI Average is the default detector for meter 3 When the EMC Standard is set to MIL, the default detector for meter 1 is Peak, meter 2 is Average and Negative Peak is the default detector for meter 3 Preset...
Page 743 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan EMC Std Preset To Enable you to choose which EMC Standard you want to Preset to. [:SENSe]:EMC:STANdard:PRESet NONE | CISPr | MIL Remote Command [:SENSe]:EMC:STANdard:PRESet? :EMC:STAN:PRES MIL Example Dependencies For model N9048B with option WF1, only CISPr|MIL are available. Attempting to set this parameter to NONE via SCPI in this model generates an error message: -241.02 Hardware missing;...
Page 744 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan sweep times with the detector set to Average or Peak). It works best with extreme amounts of smoothing, and with the average detector, with the Average Type set to Power. In those cases where the cancellation is ineffective, it nonetheless has no undesirable side-effects.
Page 745 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor:ADAPtive ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:NOISe:FLOor:ADAPtive? :CORR:NOIS:FLO ON Example First turn NFE on :CORR:NOIS:FLO:ADAP ON Then set it to Adaptive Dependencies Only appears in instruments with the NFE or NF2 license installed. In all others, the control does not appear, however the SCPI command will be accepted without error (but will have no effect) Couplings Sending CORR:NOIS:FLO ON turns NFE Adaptive OFF for backwards compatibility.
Page 746 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan when you set Global Center Freq to ON, it applies to all Modes that support Global settings. Other controls (for example, Extend Low Band) are actually set in this menu, but apply to all Modes. Global Center Freq The software maintains a Mode Global value called Global Center Freq.
Page 747 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Adjusting the EMC Std of any Mode that supports Global settings, while Global EMC Std is modifies the Global EMC Std. When Global EMC Std is switched OFF, the EMC Std of the current Mode remains unchanged, but now the EMC Std of each Mode is once again independent.
Page 748 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Restore Defaults Resets all functions in the Global settings menu to OFF. Pressing System, Restore Defaults, All Modes has the same effect. :INSTrument:COUPle:DEFault Remote Command :INST:COUP:DEF Example :GLOBal:DEFault Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.6.9 Sweep The Sweep key contains controls that enable you to control the sweep and measurement functions of the analyzer, such as the sweep or measurement time and whether in Single sweep/measure or Continuous sweep/measure mode.
Page 749 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Preset SYST:PRESet sets INIT:CONT to ON but *RST sets INIT:CONT to OFF. State Saved Saved in instrument state Annunciation The Single/ Continuous icon in the Meas Bar changes depending on the setting. A line with an arrow is single, a loop with an arrow is Continuous.
Page 750 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan The Restart function is accessed in several ways: – Pressing the Restart key – Sending the remote command INIT:IMMediate – Sending the remote command INIT:RESTart "More Information" on page 750 :INITiate[:IMMediate] Remote Command :INITiate:RESTart :INIT:IMM...
Page 751 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan – It restarts the current set of measurements if Max Hold is on for the measurement – depending on the current settings. With Hold Number (in Meas Setup menu) set to 1, or Averaging off, or no trace in Max Hold, a single sweep is equivalent to a single measurement.
Page 752 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Since all the bits that feed into OPC are cleared by the ABORt, the ABORt will cause the *OPC query to return true. 3.6.9.2 Scale X This tab accesses controls that enable you to operate the X Scale functions in the Time Domain window.
Page 753 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Full Scale Sets the Ref Value to 0 and automatically determines the scale per division based on the dwell time and number of accumulated time slices to ensure all data can fit into the graticule display of the Time Domain Display.
Page 754 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan – Blank: Update Off and Display Off – Background: Update On, Display Off (this allows a trace to be blanked and continue to update “in the background”) See the following tables for details onthe SCPI remote commands to control these variables.
Page 755 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan background and update accordingly. :TRACe[1]|2|3:RTSCan:MHOLd:DISPlay[:STATe] ON | OFF | 0 | 1 Remote Command :TRACe[1]|2|3:RTSCan:MHOLd:DISPlay[:STATe]? :TRAC3:RTSC:MHOL:DISP ON Example Preset OFF|OFF|OFF State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.6.10.3 Detector The Detector tab enables you to select the detector for the current trace. Detector Enables you to select the detector for the current trace.
Page 756 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Query Spectrum Trace Data Returns the spectrum trace of the currently selected timeslice. :TRACe[1]|2|3:RTSCan:SPECtrum[:DATA]? Remote Command :TRAC2:RTSC:SPEC? Example Queries the analyzer for the contents of Trace 2 spectrum data. Query Spectrum Max Hold Trace Data Returns the spectrum of max hold trace .
Page 757 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan Query Number of Last Available Timeslice Returns the number of the last available timeslice. :TRACe:RTSCan:TSLice:LAST? Remote Command :TRAC:RTSC:TSL:LAST? Example Notes Reset to 0 for every start of scan. Query Single Trace Spectrum Timeslice Data Returns the spectrum time slice data of the selected trace at the specified time slice number.
Page 758 3 EMI Receiver Mode 3.6 Real Time Scan [m] : 1st data of Trace 2 [m+1]: 2nd data of Trace 2 [m+2]: 3rd data of Trace 2 // If Trace 3 is turned on, N number of these will be added. [n] : 1st data of Trace 3 [n+1]: 2nd data of Trace 3 [n+2]: 3rd data of Trace 3...
Page 759 X-Series Signal Analyzers EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 4 System The System hardkey and the “gear” icon both open the System Settings dialog, which allows you to access various configuration menus and dialogs. The line of tabs down the left side let you choose various pages for configuring your instrument. Notes No remote command for this key specifically...
Page 760 4 System 4.1 System 4.1 System Allows access to several general system functions, including three Show screens for viewing system parameters. Several such Show screens are available on this and other System menu pages. They can also be accessed with the SCPI command described here.
Page 761 4 System 4.1 System :SYST:SHOW SYST Example 4.1.1.1 Show System contents (Remote Query Only) Returns the contents of the Show System screen (the entire contents, not just the currently displayed page). :SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]? Remote Command :SYST:CONF? Example Notes The output is an IEEE Block format of the Show System contents. Each line is separated by a new-line character 4.1.1.2 Computer System description (Remote Query Only) Returns the Computer System description, which consists of the operating system...
Page 762 4 System 4.1 System 4.1.4 Show Support Subscriptions Displays the software support subscription information for the licenses available on the instrument. Shows the software license, description, software support expiration date (format is YYYY.MMDD), and the software support status. The Software Version Date (format is YYYY.MMDD) shown in the header indicates the date required to access the latest software enhancements included in this version of the software.
Page 763 4 System 4.1 System The Copy all to clipboard … control copies all the data to the Windows clipboard, in comma-separated value (CSV) format. :SYST:SHOW SID Example 4.1.6 Control Panel… Opens the Windows Control Panel. Control Panel is used to configure certain elements of Windows that are not configured via the Multitouch UI System menus.
Page 764 4 System 4.1 System 4.1.7 Web Browser Launches the instrument’s default Web Browser. Usually, the default is Microsoft Edge. A mouse and external keyboard are highly desirable for using the browser. To return focus to the Instrument Application, close the browser (or use Alt-Tab). This feature is not available if Option SF1 is installed.
Page 765 4 System 4.1 System EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 766 4 System 4.2 I/O Config 4.2 I/O Config Allows you to specify and change the I/O configuration for remote control. Controls in this menu allow configuration of the I/O ports used for SCPI remote control over GPIB and LAN. The SCPI LAN parameters are set using controls in this menu, but configuration of LAN settings themselves is performed using the Windows Control Panel (DHCP, Gateway, Subnet Mask, etc.).
Page 767 4 System 4.2 I/O Config When GPIB Controller is enabled, the analyzer application itself cannot be NOTE controlled over GPIB. In this case, it can be controlled via LAN or USB. The GPIB port cannot be a Controller and Device at the same time. Only one Controller can be active on the GPIB bus at any given time.
Page 768 4 System 4.2 I/O Config – "SCPI Telnet" on page 768 – "SCPI Socket" on page 768 – "SICL Server" on page 769 – "HiSLIP Server" on page 770 – "Verbose SCPI On/Off" on page 770 – "SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Query Only)" on page 772 4.2.2.1 SCPI Telnet Turns SCPI LAN telnet capability On or Off, allowing you to limit SCPI access over LAN through telnet.
Page 769 4 System 4.2 I/O Config Preset Unaffected by Preset, but set to by Restore Defaults >"Misc" on page 814 If not set up or specified, the Secure Instrument Communications configuration setting: is State Saved OFF|ON Range 4.2.2.3 SICL Server Turns the SICL Server capability or OFF, to limit SCPI access over LAN through the SICL server.
Page 770 4 System 4.2 I/O Config 4.2.2.4 HiSLIP Server Turns the HiSLIP Server capability or OFF, to limit SCPI access over LAN through the HiSLIP server. HiSLIP stands for High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol, and is part of the IVI-6.1 specification. Example of a VISA connection string used to connect to the HiSLIP Server on an X- Series Spectrum Analyzer: TCPIP0::a-n9030a-93016::hislip0::INSTR hislip0...
Page 771 4 System 4.2 I/O Config See the example below, where the invalid command :SENS:BOGUS is sent: Normal response to :SYST:ERR? (using the Telnet window): SCPI> SENS:BOGUS SCPI> SYST:ERR? -113,"Undefined header" After turning on Verbose SCPI: SCPI> SYST:BOGUS SCPI> SYST:ERR? -113,"Undefined header;SYST:BOGUS<Err>" :SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose?
Page 772 4 System 4.2 I/O Config State Saved OFF|ON Range 4.2.2.7 SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Query Only) Returns the TCP/IP port number of the control socket associated with the SCPI socket session. This query lets you obtain the unique port number to open when a device clear is to be sent to the instrument.
Page 773 4 System 4.2 I/O Config This control lets you set the web password as desired, or to reset the password to the factory default. Selecting Web Password Reset displays a control for resetting the password as desired, or to the factory default. The built-in alpha keyboard appears. You may change the password from the factory default of “measure4u”.
Page 774 Starting with software version x.14.50, the *IDN? response in the Factory configuration indicates the Manufacturer as Keysight Technologies. If your test software is expecting the response to indicate Agilent Technologies, you can configure the response with this menu selection or SCPI command.
Page 775 4 System 4.2 I/O Config If you enter a null string (for example, by clearing the User String while editing and then pressing Done), the instrument automatically reverts to the FACTory setting. In products that run multiple instances of the X-Series Application, all instances NOTE use the same User System IDN response.
Page 776 4 System 4.2 I/O Config :SYST:PERS:DEF is equivalent to: :SYSTem:IDN “” :SYSTem:IDN:CONF DEF SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer Sets the MANufacturer field of the *IDN? response. This is the first field of the *IDN? response. :SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer <string> Remote Command :SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer? Notes When setting the MANufacturer field, the current IDN response string is modified to replace the manufacturer field with the string specified by the command.
Page 777 Resets the LAN connection. This sets parameters as follows, and restarts the LAN operation: DHCP Enabled Automatic IP Address Enabled ICMP Ping Responder Enabled keysight Web Password Dynamic DNS Enabled mDNS and DNS-SD Enabled Dynamic Link Local Addressing Enabled Auto Negotiation Enabled There is no SCPI command for this function.
Page 778 4 System 4.2 I/O Config :LXI:IDEN ON Example Preset Not part of Preset, but reset to by Restore Defaults >"All" on page 815 State Saved OFF | ON Range 4.2.6 Restore I/O Config Defaults Causes the group of settings associated with the I/O Config menu to be reset to their default values.
Page 779 4 System 4.2 I/O Config :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:STATus? Remote Command :SYST:COMM:USB:STAT? Example Notes SUSPended – Indicates that the USB bus is currently in its suspended state. The bus is in the suspended state when: – The bus is not connected to any controller –...
Page 780 4 System 4.2 I/O Config To help achieve this cooperative instrument sharing, the following remote commands are provided: – "Lock Remote I/O Request (Remote Query only)" on page 781 – "Unlock Remote I/O Session (Remote Command only)" on page 782 –...
Page 781 4 System 4.2 I/O Config Interface Single-session Multi-Session LAN VXI-11 ü (SICL) LAN Socket ü LAN HiSLIP ü LAN Telnet ü If using a single-session interface, care must be taken to ensure only one client uses the single-session interface. In particular, LAN VXI-11 (SICL) interface is a single-session interface, even though multiple clients could simultaneously connect to this interface.
Page 782 4 System 4.2 I/O Config – *OPT? – *STB? – *ESR? – :SYSTem:DATE? – :SYSTem:TIME? – :SYSTem:PON:TIME? – Queries in the :STATus subsystem – Queries in the :SYSTem:ERRor subsystem – Queries in the :SYSTem:LKEY subsystem – Queries in the :SYSTem:LOCK subsystem –...
Page 783: Multiple Network Interface Card Configuration (Remote Commands Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config :SYST:LOCK:NAME? Example Notes The information returned is a string of the format: <I/O Interface>[/<IP address>/<Session ID>] Where IP address Session ID are only provided for interfaces that provide multiple sessions Single Session interfaces (GPIB, USB-488, and LAN VXI-11) only list interface name Session ID is an internally generated identifier.
Page 784: Multiple Network Adapters Enabled (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config These commands do not apply to instruments that have only one NIC. The commands apply to all modular deployments that have a controller with multiple NICs. To configure and query these configuration options, the following remote commands are provided: –...
Page 785: Config Ipv6 Address (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config 4.2.11.3 Config IPV6 Address (Remote Command Only) :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPV6:CONFig <ipaddress> Remote Command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPV6:CONFig? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPV6:CONFig "2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334" Example :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPV6:CONFig? Notes Applies to instruments that have multiple Network Adapters. When more than one network adapter is present in the system, you must specify in the instrument config file the IP address to use to enable Remoting channel bindings.
Page 786: Preload / Unload Modes
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes The X-Series platform supports many Modes. Each Mode that is loaded uses a portion of the total available memory. At some point, this may result in insufficient free memory. This can occur during a measurement, or when loading a new Mode. A limited number of Modes can be loaded without impacting performance.
Page 787: Table Of Modes
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3.2 Table of Modes The table of Modes becomes scrollable when the number of Modes exceeds the dialog’s displayable size. Use the check boxes in the Preload column to enable or disable the preloading of the Modes that you want.
Page 788: Loaded Modes (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes Command :INST:UNL NR5G Example Notes Error message if the specified Mode is not available, -224,"Illegal parameter value;<mode> is not a valid choice" Error message if the specified Mode is not loaded and therefore cannot be unloaded, -221,"Settings conflict;<mode>...
Page 789: Menu Panel Tabs
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3.7.2 Menu Panel Tabs Allows the Menu Panel Tabs to be positioned on the RIGHt LEFT side of the menu panel. :SYSTem:DISPlay:MPTab RIGHt | LEFT Remote Command :SYSTem:DISPlay:MPTab? :SYST:DISP:MPT LEFT Example RIGHt Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to by Restore Defaults >...
Page 790: Backlight
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes – FILLed: this is the normal theme using filled objects – OUTLine: this theme uses color, but does not use fill for most areas on the display. It is ideal for images that need to be printed on inkjet printers. Although setting Display Theme to OUTLine does not affect screen image saves or prints,...
Page 791: Backlight Intensity
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes application. Pressing any other key turns backlight ON, and could potentially perform the action as well. :DISPlay:BACKlight ON | OFF Remote Command :DISPlay:BACKlight? Example Turn backlight ON: :DISP:BACK ON Turn backlight OFF: :DISP:BACK OFF Preset Pressing any key turns the backlight back ON, as does Restore Defaults >...
Page 792: Touch On/Off
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes (the default), adjusting the value with the front panel Up/Down keys or the RPG hides the Numeric Entry Panel. :SYSTem:DISPlay:NEPimmediate ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :SYSTem:DISPlay:NEPimmediate? :SYST:DISP:NEP OFF Example Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to by Restore Defaults >...
Page 793: Screen Tabs Left/Right
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes auto-filename in the entry area. You can then press Enter to accept the auto filename, or edit the name then press Enter. This allows you to easily save a file with a custom file name. :MMEMory:STORe:QSAVe NORMal | PROMpt Remote Command...
Page 794: Hide Screen Tabs In Full Screen
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to LEFT by Restore Defaults > "User Interface" on page 813 Restore Defaults >"All" on page 815 State Saved Power On Persistent (survives shutdown and restart) 4.3.7.13 Hide Screen Tabs in Full Screen This switch, when in the position, causes the Screen Tabs to be hidden when in...
Page 795: 2-Screen Orientation
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3.7.14 2-Screen Orientation When you add a second Screen using the “+” control on the Screen Tabs bar, normally the screen is added to the right of the first screen. However, sometimes it is better to add the new screen below the first screen rather than to the right, as shown below.
Page 796: Clock Format
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes New screen added below (vertical orientation) The 2-Screen Orientation switch allows you to choose between these two orientations for 2-Screen configurations. The default is the HORizontal configuration, two Screens side-by-side. :INSTrument:SCReen:ORIentation VERTical | HORizontal Remote Command :INST:SCR:ORI VERT...
Page 797: Language
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3.7.16 Language Accesses the selection of Language displayed on the menus and controls. ENGLish is the default. All Measurement Applications that share common controls will display the localized controls. The description on the control labels is bounded by the control size. Any given language will have labels in that language that are shorter or longer than the equivalent label in English.
Page 798: User Interface Type (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes This will reset all of the User Interface variables to their default state, including the menu panel location, display theme, and language. It will not affect Alignment data or settings. This action cannot be undone. Do you want to proceed? The message provides OK and Cancel buttons for you to affirm or cancel the operation.
Page 799: Power On
4 System 4.4 Power On 4.4 Power On Lets you select how the instrument should power on. In products that run multiple instances of the X-Series Application, the same NOTE Power On type is shared between all the instances. 4.4.1 Power On State Lets you select whether the instrument powers up in a default state, or some other state.
Page 800 4 System 4.4 Power On User Preset Sets Power On State to USER Preset. When the instrument is powered on in User Preset, it will User Preset each mode and switch to the "Power On Application" on page 801. Power OnUser Preset does not affect any settings other than those set by a normal User Preset.
Page 801: Power On Application
4 System 4.4 Power On If line power to the instrument is interrupted, for example by pulling the line cord plug or by switching off power to a test rack, Power OnLast State may not work properly. For proper operation, Power On Last State depends on your shutting down the instrument using the Standby key or the :SYSTem:PDOWn command.
Page 802 4 System 4.4 Power On functionality for both options, so you must decide which FPGA program you want loaded. When licenses allow for both FPGA image versions to be available, and you have not explicitly chosen an FPGA image version, then, when the firmware is updated, the Time Domain Scan version will be loaded.
Page 803 4 System 4.4 Power On silently reverts to FS1 behavior. Switching Between Enhanced Sweep Speed and Time Domain Scan FPGA Images You cannot have both full TDS and FS2 images at the same time, so to switch to the other image, you must go through the process of reloading the FPGA by choosing the desired image with the Selected FPGA control, and pressing "Load FPGA"...
Page 804: Fpga Load Preference
4 System 4.4 Power On b. If FPGA Load Preference is Enhanced Sweep Speed, the Enhanced Sweep Speed FPGA image is loaded c. If FPGA Load Preference is Prompt at Startup: a. If the last FPGA Configuration Load was Time Domain Scan, the Time Domain Scan FPGA image is loaded b.
Page 805: Load Fpga
This can take 15 minutes or more. NOTE If power is lost during the FPGA load process, the FPGA can become corrupted, CAUTION in which case the only solution is to return it to Keysight for servicing. :SYSTem:PON:FPGA:LOAD TDS | FS2 Remote Command :SYST:PON:FPGA:LOAD TDS...
Page 806: Restore Power On Defaults
4 System 4.4 Power On Selection limited to licensed features: – selection requires EMC Mode and Option TDS – requires Option FS2 The UI is blanked when there is only one licensed selection, and that selection is already loaded. Sending the SCPI for an unlicensed selection results in error: -224, “Illegal parameter value;...
Page 807 Access to Configure Applications utility A version of the utility runs the first time you power up the instrument after purchasing it from Keysight. The utility automatically configures preloads so that as many licensed applications as possible are preloaded while keeping the total estimated virtual memory usage below the limit.
Page 808 4 System 4.4 Power On Instructions are provided below and in the utility. Use the utility to find a configuration that works best for you, and then restart the analyzer program. Select All Marks all applications in the selection list. This allows you to enable all applications licensed on the instrument for pre-loading, or is a convenience for selecting all applications in one operation and then letting you deselect individual applications Deselect All...
Page 809: Configure Applications - Instrument Boot-Up
4 System 4.4 Power On 1. It will not let you preload more applications than will fit into memory at once 2. You can determine how many of your favorite applications can reside in memory at one time The utility provides a graphical representation of the amount of memory (note that the amount of memory shown here is virtual memory, which is a limitation imposed by the operating system, not by the amount of physical memory you have in your instrument).
Page 810: Configuration List (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.4 Power On – "Configuration list (Remote Command Only)" on page 810 – "Configuration Memory Available (Remote Query Only)" on page 810 – "Configuration Memory Total (Remote Query Only)" on page 810 – "Configuration Memory Used (Remote Query Only)" on page 811 –...
Page 811: Configuration Memory Used (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.4 Power On 4.4.7.4 Configuration Memory Used (Remote Query Only) Returns the amount of Virtual Memory used by all measurement applications. :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:USED? Remote Command :SYST:PON:APPL:VMEM:USED? Example Preset Not affected by Preset 4.4.7.5 Configuration Application Memory (Remote Query Only) Returns the amount of Virtual Memory a particular application consumes.
Page 812: Restore Defaults
4 System 4.5 Restore Defaults 4.5 Restore Defaults Provides initialization of system setting groups, including the option to set the entire instrument back to a factory default state. In products that run multiple instances of the X-Series Application, all instances NOTE have the same factory default states for Restore Defaults.
Page 813: I/O Config
4 System 4.5 Restore Defaults 4.5.2 I/O Config Causes the group of settings associated with the I/O Config menu to be reset to their default values. This also happens on Restore Misc Defaults, which has a SCPI command, although I/O Config does not. When I/O Config is selected, a message appears saying: This will reset all of the I/O Config variables to their default state, including the GPIB address and SCPI LAN settings...
Page 814: Alignments
4 System 4.5 Restore Defaults The dialog includes OK and Cancel controls, for you to affirm or cancel the operation. :SYST:DEF PON Example 4.5.5 Alignments Causes the Alignments system settings to be reset to their default values. This does not affect any Alignment data stored in the system. After performing this function, it may impact the auto-alignment time of the instrument until a new alignment baseline has been established.
Page 815: All
Do you want to proceed? The dialog includes OK and Cancel controls, for you to confirm or cancel the operation. If you are using a Keysight USB External Mixer, then you will need to perform NOTE Refresh USB Mixer Connection (SCPI command...
Page 816 4 System 4.5 Restore Defaults :SYST:DEF ALL Example Couplings All causes the currently running measurement to be aborted, and sets all modes to a consistent state, so it is unnecessary to couple any settings Backwards Compatibility SCPI :SYST:PRES:PERS :SYST:DEF ALL Notes is the same as :SYSTem:PRESet:PERSistent...
Page 817: Alignments
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6 Alignments Accesses the alignment system of the instrument. You can control the automatic alignments, view alignment statistics and manually perform alignments. The current setting of the alignment system is displayed in the Meas Bar along the top of the display.
Page 818 4 System 4.6 Alignments – Off: Off (amber) Status Bits/OPC When Auto Align is executing, Bit 0 in the Status Operational register is set dependencies An interfering signal at the RF Input may prevent automatic alignment of the RF subsystem. If this occurs, the Error Condition message “Align RF skipped”...
Page 819 4 System 4.6 Alignments environment, the alignments occur one-ninth as often as in Normal. With these less frequent alignments, all accuracy specifications (those expressed with ±x dB tolerances) change by nominally a factor of 1.4. If the condition “Align Now, All required” is set, transitioning to Auto Align, Light performs the required alignments, clears the “Align Now, All required”...
Page 820: All But Rf
4 System 4.6 Alignments set to Off, you are now responsible for maintaining warranted operation by updating the alignments when they expire. The Auto Align, Alert mechanism will notify you when alignments have expired. One solution to expired alignments is to perform the Align All, Now operation.
Page 821 4 System 4.6 Alignments of four settings: Setting Option TTEMperature Time & Temperature LIGHt Time & Temperature Light WEEK 7 days NONE None With Auto Align set to Normal, the configuration of Alert is not relevant, because the instrument’s software maintains the instrument in warranted operation. TTEMperature A confirmation is required when a selection other than is chosen.
Page 822: Align Now
Keysight does not recommend using this selection in any other circumstances, because of the risk of accuracy performance drifting well beyond expected levels without the operator being informed.
Page 823 4 System 4.6 Alignments nature sequential, meaning they must complete before any other SCPI commands can be processed. In many cases the alignment itself will take longer than the typical SCPI timeout value. Furthermore, status cannot be easily queried while a sequential command is running.
Page 824: Align Now All
4 System 4.6 Alignments – "Align Now All" on page 824 – "Align Now All but RF" on page 826 – "Align Now RF" on page 828 – "Align Now Expired" on page 829 – "Align Now Preselector" on page 830 –...
Page 825 4 System 4.6 Alignments required” is generated, and bits 11 and 12 are set in the Status Questionable Calibration register. The query form of the remote commands (:CALibration[:ALL]? or *CAL?) invokes the alignment of all subsystems and returns a success or failure value. An interfering user signal is not grounds for failure;...
Page 826: Align Now All But Rf
4 System 4.6 Alignments interfering signal removed Couplings Initializes the time for the Last Align Now All Time Records the temperature for the Last Align Now All Temperature If Align RF component succeeded, initializes the time for the Last Align Now, RF Time If Align RF component succeeded, records the temperature for the Last Align Now, RF Temperature Status Bits/OPC Bits 11, 12, or 14 may be set in the Status Questionable Calibration register...
Page 827 4 System 4.6 Alignments This operation might be chosen instead of All if you do not want the device under test to experience a large change in input impedance, such as a temporary open circuit at the instrument input. The query form of the remote commands (:CALibration:NRF?) invokes the alignment and returns a success or failure value.
Page 828: Align Now Rf
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CALibration:NRF:NPENding (start the All but RF calibration) :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? (If bit 0 is set, then the system is doing calibration, you should do re-query until this bit is cleared) :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? (to check if there are any errors/- failures in previous calibration procedure) 4.6.2.3 Align Now RF In PXE, the key label is Align Now RF Only...
Page 829: Align Now Expired
4 System 4.6 Alignments Successful completion clears the Error Conditions “Align RF skipped” and the Error Conditions “Align RF failed” and “Align Now, RF required”, and clears Bits 3, 11, and 12 in the Status Questionable Calibration register A failure encountered during alignment generates the Error Condition message “Align RF failed” and sets Bit 3 in the Status Questionable Calibration register An interfering user signal will result in Bits 11 and 12 being set in the Status Questionable Calibration register, to indicate Align Now, RF is required...
Page 830: Align Now Preselector
4 System 4.6 Alignments While Align Now Expired is performing the alignment, the Calibrating bit (Bit 0 in the Status Operation register) is set. Completion, or termination, clears Bit 0 in the Status Operation register This command is sequential; that is, it must complete before further SCPI commands are processed. Interrupting the alignment from remote is accomplished by invoking Device Clear followed by :ABORt Successful completion clears bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration register...
Page 831: Align Now All But Rf Preselector
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6.2.6 Align Now All but RF Preselector Only available in models with the RF Preselector, such as the N9048B. It is identical to the "Align Now All" on page 824 (plus RF Presel) function, except that the RF Preselector is only partially aligned.
Page 832: Align Now External Mixer
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CALibration:RFPSelector:ONLY? :CAL:RFPS:ONLY Example Notes Query returns 0 if successful, or 1 if failed When Align 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz is performing the alignment, bit 0 in the Status Operation register is set. Completion, or termination, will clear bit 0 in the Status Operation register This command is sequential;...
Page 833: Align Source
4 System 4.6 Alignments Interrupting the alignment from remote is accomplished by invoking Device Clear followed by the :ABORt command A failure encountered during alignment generate the Error Condition message “Align LO failed” and sets Bit 5 in the Status Questionable Calibration register. Successful completion clears the “Align LO failed”...
Page 834: Align Receiver
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CALibration:INTernal:SOURce:NPENding (start an internal source calibration) :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? (Check if the calibration is completed or not, If Bit 0 is set, then the system is doing calibration. Repeat this query until the bit is cleared) :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:CONDition? (Check if Bit 14 is set or not.
Page 835: Align Lo Leakage
4 System 4.6 Alignments It is suggested to perform Fast Alignment every 8 hours or when temperature has changed more than 5°C from the previous Fast Alignment. :CALibration:INTernal:FAST[:ALL] Remote Command :CALibration:INTernal:FAST[:ALL]? :CAL:INT:FAST Example Notes The query initiates an Alignment and returns 0 if successful, or 1 if failed Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A /15A/16A 4.6.2.12 Align LO Leakage...
Page 836: Align Fast Rrh Amplitude
4 System 4.6 Alignments Aligns the Amplitude of Remote Radio Head. This operation could take quite a long time to run. For M1741A/49A/49B RRH, make sure to connect 50-ohm terminations to Head CAUTION Tx/Rx 1 and 2 ports. :CALibration:INTernal:RRHead:AMPLitude Remote Command :CALibration:INTernal:RRHead:AMPLitude? :CAL:INT:RRH:AMPL? Example...
Page 837: Align Vxt Transceiver
4 System 4.6 Alignments Synchronizes RRH LO Clocks. :CALibration:INTernal:RRHead:LOSync Remote Command :CALibration:INTernal:RRHead:LOSync? :CAL:INT:RRH:LOS? Example Notes The query initiates an Alignment and returns 0 if successful, or 1 if failed Dependencies Only appears in VXT based solutions with M1741A/42A/49A/49B RRH :CALibration:INTernal:LOSync Backwards Compatibility SCPI :CALibration:INTernal:LOSync?
Page 838: Align Selected Freq Ranges
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CALibration:UPDown:CONVerter Remote Command :CALibration:UPDown:CONVerter? :CAL:UPD:CONV Example Notes The query initiates an Alignment and returns 0 if successful, or 1 if failed Dependencies Only appears on M9410E/11E/15E/16E 4.6.2.20 Align Selected Freq Ranges VXT models M9410A/11A provide five alignments: Align Now All, Align Source, Align Receiver, Align Fast and Align LO Leakage.
Page 839: Enable Extended Freq Range
4 System 4.6 Alignments Only functional for the following alignments: – Align Now All of VXT models M9410A/11A and M9410E/11E – Align Source – Align Receiver – Align Fast – Align LO Leakage – Align VXT Transceiver of M910E/11E – Align Up Down Converter of M9410E/11E Align Selected Freq Ranges only guarantees the hardware performance within the frequency range Preset Enable Extended Freq Range...
Page 840 4 System 4.6 Alignments Dependencies Only appears when "Align VXT Transceiver" on page 837 Error message “Invalid alignment frequency range” is reported if start and stop frequencies are invalid, such as: 1. Stop frequency - Start frequency < 0 2. the count of start and stop frequency is not even 3.
Page 841: Enable
4 System 4.6 Alignments Products Preset Receiver Source minimum Minimum Receiver Source with minimum settable center maximum maximum M9471A settable (center)frequency frequency settable(center) settable frequency with Spec frequency (center) frequency M941xE 1 GHz 330.000005 330 MHz 380MHz 26.499999995 26.5GHz without LFE option M941xE 1 GHz...
Page 842: Align Low Band
4 System 4.6 Alignments There is no alert for the External Mixer Path alignment. You are responsible for checking the temperature shift since the last Align Now, External Mixer Path, to determine whether the external mixer path alignment needs to be executed. :CALibration:INTernal:EMPath Remote Command :CALibration:INTernal:EMPath?
Page 843: Path Delay Calibration
4 System 4.6 Alignments This alignment corrects slow-rate drift, which does not impair specifications for NOTE time periods shorter than one week. Thus, you need only perform this alignment on a weekly basis to maintain specifications. This alignment typically takes >2 minutes to complete.
Page 844 4 System 4.6 Alignments Connect the RF In of the primary module to the OUT port (COMMON, PORT 1) NOTE of the combiner. Before performing Path Delay Calibration of Sources, please confirm that: NOTE – Each of the RF Out ports is connected to the RF In port of the Primary NOTE channel, using an RF combiner.
Page 845: Path Delay Correction On/Off(Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6.3.2 Path Delay Correction On/Off(Remote Command only) On/Off the path delay correction to enable the calibration data on the source of the module. :CALibration:PDELay:CORRection ON | OFF Remote Command :CALibration:PDELay:CORRection? :CAL:PDEL:CORR ON Example Notes If the Path Delay Calibration has never been performed and there is no calibration correction data in the controller, an alert is generated Preset ON|OFF...
Page 846 4 System 4.6 Alignments “Time while Auto Align off” is not available in VXT models M9410A/11A. A successful Align Now, RF sets the Last Align RF temperature to the current temperature, and resets the Last Align RF time. A successful Align Now All or Align Now All but RF sets the Last Align Now All temperature to the current temperature, and resets the Last Align Now All time.
Page 847 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Current Temperature at Remote Radio Head :CALibration:TEMPerature:CURRent:RRHead? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:CURR:RRH? Example Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade Dependencies Only appears when Align RRH Amplitude is available State Saved Query Current Temperature at Remote Radio Head LO :CALibration:TEMPerature:CURRent:RRHead:LO? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:CURR:RRH:LO?
Page 848 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Temperature of Last Align Now Receiver :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:RECeiver? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:INT:REC? Example Notes Value in degrees Centigrade when the last successful Align Now Receiver was executed Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A State Saved Query Time since Last Align Now Source :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:SOURce? Remote Command :CAL:TIME:INT:SOUR?
Page 849 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Time since Last Align Now LO Leakage :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:LOLeakage? Remote Command :CAL:TIME:INT:LOL? Example Notes Value in hours since the last successful Align Now LO Leakage Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A/15A/16A State Saved Query Temperature of Last Align Now LO Leakage :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:LOLeakage? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:INT:LOL?
Page 850 4 System 4.6 Alignments :CAL:TIME:INT:RRH:LOS? Example Notes Value in hours since the last successful Align LO Clock Dependencies Only appears in VXT based solutions with M1741A/42A/49A/49B RRH State Saved :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:LOSync? Backwards Compatibility SCPI Query Temperature of Last Align LO Clock :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:RRHead:LOSync? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:INT:RRH:LOS?
Page 851 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Time since Last Align Fast RRH Amplitude :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:RRHead:AMPLitude:FAST? Remote Command :CAL:TIME:INT:RRH:AMPL:FAST? Example Notes Value in hours since the last successful Align Fast RRH Amplitude Dependencies Only appears in VXT based solutions with M1742A RRH State Saved Query Temperature of Last Align Fast RRH Amplitude :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:RRHead:AMPLitude:FAST? Remote Command...
Page 852 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Temperature of Last Align Now RF :CALibration:TEMPerature:LRF? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:LRF? Example Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade at which the last successful Align Now RF was executed, either individually or as a component of Align Now All State Saved Query Time since Last Align IF :CALibration:TIME:LIF?
Page 853 4 System 4.6 Alignments Dependencies In models that do not include preselectors, this command is not enabled and any attempt to set or query yields an error State Saved Query Time since Auto Align Off :CALibration:AUTO:TIME:OFF? Remote Command :CAL:AUTO:TIME:OFF? Example Notes Value is the elapsed time, in seconds, since Auto Align has been set to Off or Off with Alert.
Page 854 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Temperature of Last Align Now 30 MHz – 3.6 MHz :CALibration:TEMPerature:RFPSelector:LRADiated? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:RFPS:LRAD? Example Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade at which the last successful Align Now, 30 MHz – 3.6 GHz was executed State Saved Query Next Scheduled Alignment Time :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:TIME:NEXT? Remote...
Page 855 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Temperature of Last Align Now External Mixer Path :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:EMPath? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:INT:EMP? Example Notes Value in degrees Centigrade when the last successful Align Now External Mixer Path was executed Dependencies Only appears option MXP is installed State Saved Query Time since Last Align Now Low Band :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:LBANd?
Page 856 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Time since Last Align VXT Transceiver :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:VXT:TRANsceiver? Remote Command :CAL:TIME:INT:VXT:TRAN? Example Notes Value in hours since the last successful Align VXT Transceiver Returns if Align VXT Transceiver has never been performed on the instrument Dependencies Only appears in M9410E/11E/15E/16E State Saved Query Temperature of Last Align VXT Transceiver...
Page 857: Timebase Dac
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CAL:TIME:PDEL:SOUR? Example Notes The value is the elapsed time in hours since the last successful Path Delay Calibration has been performed Returns NaN if the Path Delay Calibration has never been performed State Saved Query Temperature of Last Path Delay Calibration :CALibration:TEMPerature:PDELay:SOURce? Remote Command...
Page 858: User Value
4 System 4.6 Alignments USER setting sets the Timebase DAC to the value set on the User Value control. In this case the value displayed at the top of the screen is the user value. :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE CALibrated | USER Remote Command :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE? :CAL:FREQ:REF:MODE CAL Example...
Page 859: Advanced
Presel Center is desired. Presel Center is required prior to any measurement for best (and warranted) amplitude accuracy. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Preselector operation be performed yearly as part of any calibration, but performing this operation every three months can be worthwhile.
Page 860 4 System 4.6 Alignments However, since the old characterization data is purged at the beginning of the characterization, you now have an uncharacterized preselector. You should re- execute this function and allow it to finish before making any further preselected measurements.
Page 861: Characterize Reference Clock
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6.6.2 Characterize Reference Clock Calibrates the Reference Input Phase with the External Reference Output. This feature is only available when either option DP2 or B40 is present. It requires connecting the 10 MHz OUT to the EXT REF IN port with a BNC cable before running the characterization.
Page 862 4 System 4.6 Alignments Notes Value is the date and time the last successful Characterize Reference Clock was executed. The date is separated from the time by a space character. Returns “” if Characterize Reference Clock has never been performed on the instrument Dependencies Option DP2 or B40 State Saved...
Page 863: Characterize Noise Floor
4 System 4.6 Alignments Step 3 of the guided calibration sequence: 4.6.6.3 Characterize Noise Floor On instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated Noise Floor used by Noise Floor Extensions should be refreshed periodically. To do this, press Characterize Noise Floor. When you press this control, the instrument stops any measurement currently underway, and a dialog appears with an OK and Cancel button that says: This action will take several minutes to perform.
Page 864 Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed when the instrument is operating at an ambient temperature that is significantly different than the ambient temperature at which this alignment was last run.
Page 865: Calibration Temperature History
4 System 4.6 Alignments Dependencies In models that do not include NF2, this command is not enabled and any attempt to set or query yields an error State Saved :CALibration:TEMPerature:NFLoor? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:NFL? Example Notes Value is the temperature of the last successful Characterize Noise Floor was executed Returns “”...
Page 866: Tds Alignment
4 System 4.6 Alignments Temperature Seconds Ago Lets you query temperature X seconds ago. If no data exists for the requested time, the returned value is 9.91e+37. :CALibration:TEMPerature:AGO? <seconds> Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:AGO? 75 Example Oldest Temperature Value Lets you query the oldest recorded temperature value. :CALibration:TEMPerature:OLDest[:TEMPerature]? Remote Command...
Page 867: Backup Or Restore Align Data
Press OK and the instrument will shut down and open the backup utility. Alignment data for the instrument resides on the hard drive in a database. Keysight uses high quality hard drives; however, it is highly recommended the alignment data be backed-up to storage outside of the instrument.
Page 868: Alignment Data Wizard (Without Flash)
4 System 4.6 Alignments of the backup on the flash and the timestamp of the alignment data in use on the disk. If the backup on the flash has newer data, you are given the opportunity to restore the data from the backup before the application is loaded. If you respond Yes, the Backup and Restore Alignment Data wizard (see "Alignment Data Wizard (with Flash)"...
Page 869 4 System 4.6 Alignments The default backup location for instruments without internal flash will be the first drive identified as an external drive (USB or LAN) if such is available; or, if not, the internal D: partition. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 870 4 System 4.6 Alignments The default file name is <model number>_<serial number>_<date in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS>.bkz. The default file extension for legacy backup files was .bak. The Backup and Restore operations support both the .bak (legacy format) and .bkz formats. If a USB drive is present, it will be selected by default. The path defaults to the AlignmentBackups folder, and a filename is automatically created, in the form: <model>_<serial number>_<date><time>.bkz...
Page 871 4 System 4.6 Alignments EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 872 4 System 4.6 Alignments The restore operation checks the validity of the restore file using the database's built-in file validation. If the restore file is corrupt, the existing alignment data will remain in use. If the serial number information in the backup file being restored is different from that of the instrument, the following message appears (the serial numbers shown are examples): EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 873 4 System 4.6 Alignments The default restore location for instruments without internal flash will be the first drive identified as an external drive (USB or LAN) if such is available; or, if not, the internal D: partition. The default restore file will be the most recent file that matches the default backup file name format: <model number>_<serial number>_ <date>.bkz...
Page 874 4 System 4.6 Alignments Changing the drive letter also modifies the path displayed in the box below. When this step is first loaded, the drive drop-down menu is populated with connected drives, which provide you with read access. The path defaults to the AlignBackups folder.
Page 875 4 System 4.6 Alignments EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 876 4 System 4.6 Alignments .bak When restoring data in the legacy format, Administrator privileges are required. You will be prompted when you attempt a restore (indicated by the UAC Shield on the Restore button below). EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 877: Perform Backup (Without Flash) (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.6 Alignments Perform Backup (without Flash) (Remote Command Only) Invokes an alignment data backup operation to the provided location. Keysight recommends that the specified location should be external to the NOTE instrument (USB or Mapped Network Drive). :CALibration:DATA:BACKup <filename>...
Page 878: Alignment Data Wizard (With Flash)
4 System 4.6 Alignments Alignment Data Wizard (with Flash) If your instrument has Processor Assembly type PC6S or PC7S (see "Show System" on page 760) the instrument has an internal flash EEPROM that can store a backup of the alignment data. In this case, the interface to the Alignment Data Wizard is enhanced to accommodate this internal storage.
Page 879 4 System 4.6 Alignments Having selected Backup or Restore, you then select the source or destination for the alignment data. As shown below, you can select either: – Internal flash EEPROM, or, – External Removable Drive (which includes the SD card described in "Backup or Restore Align Data…"...
Page 880 4 System 4.6 Alignments The final page of the wizard asks you to confirm the choices made in the previous pages. When the operation is complete, an indication is displayed on the same page, as below. Backup EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 881 4 System 4.6 Alignments Restore EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 882 4 System 4.6 Alignments When restoring alignment data, if the serial number information in the backup file being restored is different from that of the instrument, the following message appears (the serial numbers shown are examples): Immediately before the actual restoration, a final confirmation message is displayed detailing what is being restored and the current database that will be overwritten on the disk (the dates and versions are examples): EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 883: Perform Backup (With Flash) (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.6 Alignments When backing up alignment data to the flash, if there is already an existing backup on the flash, a final confirmation message is displayed detailing what is being backed up and what will be overwritten on the flash (again, the dates and versions are examples): Perform Backup (with Flash) (Remote Command Only) Invokes an alignment data backup operation to the internal flash EEPROM.
Page 884: Ogrf Preselector
4 System 4.6 Alignments Align Now All must be executed if the value of the Timebase DAC results in a change. :SYST:DEF ALIG Example Notes Alignment processing that results as the transition to Auto Align Normal will be executed sequentially; *OPC? *WAI thus...
Page 885: Align Now, 30 Mhz To 3.6 Ghz
4 System 4.6 Alignments The “Align 20 Hz to 30 MHz required” Error Condition will appear when this alignment has expired. User is now responsible to perform the Align Now, 20 Hz to 30 MHz to keep the receiver in warranted operation. This alignment can only be performed by user as it is not part of the Auto Align process.
Page 886: Align Now, 20 Hz To 3.6 Ghz
4 System 4.6 Alignments The “Align 30 MHz to 3.6 GHz required” Error Condition appears when this alignment has expired. You must now perform Align Now, 30 MHz to 3.6 GHz to keep the receiver in warrantied operation. :CALibration:RFPSelector:RADiated Remote Command :CALibration:RFPSelector:RADiated? :CAL:RFPS:RAD Example...
Page 887: Alert
4 System 4.6 Alignments The “Align 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz required” Error Condition appears when this alignment has expired.You must now perform the Align Now, 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz to keep the receiver in warrantied operation. :CALibration:RFPSelector:FULL Remote Command :CALibration:RFPSelector:FULL? :CAL:RFPS:FULL Example...
Page 888: Scheduler
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6.6.8 Scheduler Setting the Scheduler to triggers execution of the scheduled task based on the recurrence and time set in the scheduler since the last successful of the specific alignment. A warning condition of “RF Preselector alignment scheduler is ON” appears when the scheduler is set to ON.
Page 889: Date/Time
4 System 4.6 Alignments – Task 3 is the 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz alignment :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:TASK T1 | T2 | T3 Remote Command :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:TASK? :CAL:RFPS:SCH:TASK T1 Example Notes Changing the task does not reset the Scheduler time, and the alignment is based on the current scheduled configuration to occur Preset Unaffected by Preset but set to...
Page 890: Hour
4 System 4.6 Alignments Hour Lets you configure the hour for the scheduled task. The command to configure the date and time parameters of the scheduler is the same; but they each have their own front panel-control. Notes "Date/Time" on page 889 Preset Unaffected by Preset but set to Current hour and 00 by Restore Defaults >"Alignments"...
Page 891: Day
4 System 4.6 Alignments Notes New scheduled date to run the alignment task is updated when this parameter is changed State Saved Range 1-52 Lets you set the Day of the Week the scheduler will run a scheduled task. :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence:DAY SUN | MON | TUE | WED | THU Remote | FRI | SAT Command...
Page 892: Licensing
For any feature to be enabled, the SW Support Expiration Date of the enabling license must be greater than or equal to the software version date when that feature was first introduced. See the Keysight web site for features related to a specific software application and their required support date.
Page 893: Software Support Expiration Date
Setting up network licenses is done via the Keysight Floating License Manager (available on external Keysight web) and it has an Installation Guide that can be downloaded from that web page. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 894: Application Licenses
4 System 4.7 Licensing 4.7.4.1 Application Licenses Application Licenses (like N9077EM0E-1NP) are automatically checked out when entering the Mode that uses them, and they are automatically checked-in when leaving that Mode. Because the server may have already checked out the last license for the application to another instrument, there is now the possibility that a mode switch will fail because a required license could not be checked out from the server.
Page 895: List Licenses Checked Out (Remote Query Only)
Keysight. As part of the borrow operation, you specify how long to borrow the license. This borrow period is in hours and can be any time up to the maximum allowed by the license.
Page 896: Borrow A License
4.7.4.6 Borrow a License Licenses are borrowed by using the Keysight License Manager 6 application. This can be launched from the System Licensing screen. Graphic The corresponding remote command is: :SYSTem:LKEY:BORRow "<feature>[,<version>]",<return date>...
Page 897: Listing Borrowed Licenses And Return A Borrowed License
In all other cases, (not borrowed, not installed, etc.) the return is an empty string 4.7.4.7 Listing Borrowed Licenses and Return a Borrowed License The Keysight License Manager 6 can also be used to see the currently borrowed licenses or return a license before the automatic return time.
Page 898: Return A Borrowed License (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.7 Licensing N9073EM0E,2018.0831,20-Aug-2018 N9077EM0E,2018.0831,20-Aug-2018 Return a Borrowed License (Remote Command Only) :SYSTem:LKEY:BORRow:RETurn "<feature>" Remote Command :SYST:LKEY:BORR:RET "N9080EM0E" Example Dependencies When <feature> is not a valid license or when a license is not borrowed, one of the following errors is issued: –...
Page 899: Usb Portable Licenses
USB Portable licenses before the licenses can be used. Currently, an instrument can only be configured for Network or USB Portable licenses or both. – To set up USB Portable licenses, in the Keysight Floating License Manager select “Start a floating license server with a license file” and add files containing the USB Portable licenses desired –...
Page 900: Install License (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.7 Licensing This feature is not available if Option SF1 is installed. NOTE For help on licensing, select Help in the menu bar at the top of the License Explorer window. 4.7.8 Install License (Remote Command Only) Used to add a license to the instrument. An example of such a command would be as below.
Page 901: List Licenses (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.7 Licensing 1FP”,”027253AD27F83CDA5673A9BA5F427FDA5E4F25AEB1017638211AC9F60D9C639FE53973590 9C551DE0A91” This command does not work for Transportable, Network or USB Portable NOTE licenses. :SYSTem:LKEY:DELete <"OptionInfo">,<"LicenseInfo"> Remote Command <”OptionInfo”> Notes contains the feature and the version. You must specify the feature but can omit the version. If you omit the version, the system regards it as the latest one, if more than one version is installed <”LicenseInfo”>...
Page 902: Validate License (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.7 Licensing 4.7.11 Validate License (Remote Query Only) Lets you query whether a particular license is currently valid. :SYSTem:LKEY? <"OptionInfo"> Remote Command :SYST:LKEY? "N9073A-1FP" Example Notes <”OptionInfo”> contains the feature and the version. You must specify the feature but can omit the version.
Page 903: Security
Dependencies Grayed-out unless the current user has Administrator privileges Preset Unaffected by Preset or any "Restore Defaults" on page 812. A Keysight Recovery sets the USB to write protect State Saved Range Read-Write | Read only 4.8.2 Restore Security Defaults Sets USB Read/Write to Enable.
Page 904: Diagnostics
This is a separate application that helps maintain your instrument at peak performance. You can set the cal interval, configure cal due reminders, check the cal status, view cal certificates and test reports, and contact Keysight for a cal service. The embedded help documentation can be accessed in the instrument at: C:\Program Files\Keysight\Calibration Advisor\PCA.chm, or via the ? button at the...
Page 905: Query The Operating Temperature Extremes (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.9 Diagnostics “<Cal Signal>,<AC/DC>,<2dB #1 Atten>,<2dB #2 Atten>,<6dB Atten>,<10dB Atten>,<20dB Atten>,<30dB Atten>,<Fixed Atten>,<Low Noise Path Switch>,<Presel Bypass>” Items in the list not pertaining to your hardware configuration return as -999 for those items Dependencies Not supported by E6607C 4.9.4 Query the Operating Temperature Extremes (Remote Query Only) Returns the low operating temperature extreme value.
Page 906: Service
4 System 4.10 Service 4.10 Service Accesses capabilities performed in the factory or under instructions from repair procedures. This key is only visible when the logged-in user is “advanceduser” or “saservice”. The first access to the Service menu after invoking the instrument application will require an authentication Service Code.
Page 907: System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only)
4 System 4.11 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.11 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) These commands have no front-panel key equivalent. – "List installed Options (Remote Query Only)" on page 907 – "Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only)" on page 908 –...
Page 908: Lock The Front-Panel Keys (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.11 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.11.2 Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only) Disables the instrument keyboard to prevent local input when the instrument is KLOCk controlled remotely. Annunciation showing a “K” for (keyboard lock) alerts the local user that the keyboard is locked.
Page 909 4 System 4.11 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) As soon as you do this, the computer is locked. The initial login screen appears; no- one can access the computer at that point unless they have an account and know the account’s password.
Page 910: List Scpi Commands (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.11 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) "LockWorkStation - Failed to initiate function" See also "Local Button" on page 115. :SYSTem:LWSTation Remote Command :SYST:LWST Example Notes The lock remains in effect until a user logs in State Saved 4.11.4 List SCPI Commands (Remote Query Only) Outputs a list of the valid SCPI commands for the currently selected Mode.
Page 911: Scpi Activity History (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.11 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.11.6 SCPI activity history (Remote Query only) Instrument remote operation usage via SCPI can be monitored using :SYSTem:METRics:SCPI?. The monitoring occurs for SCPI control from any I/O channel (GPIB, USB, or LAN). The information of the usage pertains to the activity since the instrument application was started;...
Page 912: Scpi Version Query (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.11 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.11.8 SCPI Version Query (Remote Query Only) Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies. The SCPI industry standard changes regularly. This command indicates the version used when the instrument SCPI commands were defined. :SYSTem:VERSion? Remote Command :SYST:VERS?
Page 913: Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.11 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.11.11 Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only) Input Overload errors are reported using the Input Overload status bit (bit 12 in the Measurement Integrity Status Register). Input Overloads (for example, ADC Overload errors) can come and go with great frequency, generating many error events (for example, for signals just on the verge of overload), and so are not put into the SCPI error queue by default.
Page 914: Preset
X-Series Signal Analyzers EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 5 Preset The Preset functions can be accessed in two ways: – By pressing the Mode Preset or User Preset front panel keys: – From the menu "Preset Dropdown" on page 917, which appears when you press the green Preset icon (in the upper right corner of the display): Types of Preset...
Page 915 5 Preset Type Of Preset SCPI Command Scope of Preset Front Panel Access Defaults" on page all measurements in the Mode, Dropdown" on affects all parameters in the Mode, page 917 but does not affect Input/Output or System variables Does not preset the RF Source. :SYSTem:DEFault MODes "Restore Defaults Affects all parameters in all Modes,...
Page 916 5 Preset Type Of Preset SCPI Command Scope of Preset Front Panel Access Interface Defaults" Interface” group Defaults on page 797 Does not preset the RF Source User Interface tabs :SYSTem:DEFault PON "Restore Power Affects all variables in the ”Power On” System >...
Page 917: Preset Dropdown
5 Preset 5.1 Preset Dropdown 5.1 Preset Dropdown The Preset dropdown contains the following controls. In the image below, click a control for details of that control. EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 918: Mode Preset
5 Preset 5.2 Mode Preset 5.2 Mode Preset Returns the current Mode to a known state. Mode Presetonly presets the current Screen; it does not affect any other Screens. Mode Preset also presets the RF Source. In this sense, it is equivalent to pressing Source Preset on the Input/Output, RF Source menu panel.
Page 919 5 Preset 5.2 Mode Preset Backwards In X-Series, the legacy “Factory Preset” has been replaced by Mode Preset, which only presets the Compatibility currently active Mode, not the entire instrument. In X-Series, you preset the entire instrument by Notes using System, Restore System Defaults All, which behaves essentially the same way as restore System Defaults did in ESA and PSA There is also no “Preset Type”...
Page 920: Restore Mode Defaults
5 Preset 5.3 Restore Mode Defaults 5.3 Restore Mode Defaults Most settings within a Mode are affected by "Mode Preset" on page 918, but some Mode settings are unaffected (for example, Noise Floor Extensions, Limit Line data, reference marker numbers, etc.) Restore Mode Defaults resets all these additional settings, as well as all the Mode Preset settings, except the RF Source.
Page 921: Input/Output Preset
5 Preset 5.4 Input/Output Preset 5.4 Input/Output Preset Resets the group of settings and data associated with the Input/Output front-panel key to their default values. These settings are not affected by "Mode Preset" on page 918, because they are generally associated with connections to the instrument, which generally should remain unaltered.
Page 922: Full Mode Preset
5 Preset 5.5 Full Mode Preset 5.5 Full Mode Preset Same as performing "Mode Preset" on page 918, "Restore Mode Defaults" on page 920, and "Input/Output Preset" on page 921. Essentially a factory preset of the current Mode. When Full Mode Preset is selected, a message appears saying: This will reset all of the current Mode’s variables and all of the Input/Output variables to their default state, including Input and Output selection and settings, Amplitude Correction, Frequency Reference and RF Source settings.
Page 923: User Preset
5 Preset 5.6 User Preset 5.6 User Preset Recalls a state previously saved using "Save User Preset" on page 925. You can save a User Preset state for each Mode, allowing you to define your own favorite state for each Mode and recall it at the touch of a single button. User Preset can be executed by pressing the User Preset front panel key, or from the "Preset Dropdown"...
Page 924 5 Preset 5.6 User Preset In X-Series, “state” always includes all of this data; so whenever state is loaded, or User Preset is executed, all the traces, limit lines and corrections are affected In ESA and PSA, User Preset affected the entire instrument’s state. In X-Series, User Preset only recalls the state for the active Mode.
Page 925: Save User Preset
5 Preset 5.7 Save User Preset 5.7 Save User Preset Saves the state of the currently active Mode in a unique location, for recall by the "User Preset" on page 923. Each Mode has one such location, so, for each Mode, one User Preset can be defined.
Page 926: User Preset All Modes
5 Preset 5.8 User Preset All Modes 5.8 User Preset All Modes Recalls all the User Preset files for each Mode, switches to the Power-on Mode, and activates the saved measurement from the Power-on Mode User Preset file. User Preset All Modes can be executed from the "Preset Dropdown"...
Page 927: Restore Defaults All Modes
5 Preset 5.9 Restore Defaults All Modes 5.9 Restore Defaults All Modes Resets all Modes in the current Screen back to their default states, just as Restore Mode Defaults does, switches the current Screen to the Power-on Mode, and causes the default measurement for the Power On Mode to be active in the current Screen.
Page 928: User Preset All Screens
5 Preset 5.10 User Preset All Screens 5.10 User Preset All Screens Recalls a screen configuration previously saved using "Save User Preset All Screens" on page 929. The complete configuration of all Screens is loaded, including the state of each Screen. Because User Preset All Screens performs a Recall State as part of its function, it affects all variables that are normally only reset by "Restore Mode Defaults"...
Page 929: Save User Preset All Screens
5 Preset 5.11 Save User Preset All Screens 5.11 Save User Preset All Screens Saves the current Screen Configuration in a unique location, for recall by "User Preset All Screens" on page 928. Save User Preset All Screens can be executed from the "Preset Dropdown"...
Page 930: Restore Screen Defaults
5 Preset 5.12 Restore Screen Defaults 5.12 Restore Screen Defaults Resets the Screen configuration to the factory default; deleting all screens, all screen names, all screen states, and setting "Multiscreen" on page 155 to Off. A single screen will remain, set to the Power-on Mode, in a preset state with the default screen name.
Page 931: Preset Type (Remote Command Only)
5 Preset 5.13 Preset Type (Remote Command Only) 5.13 Preset Type (Remote Command Only) :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE FACTory | MODE | USER Remote Command :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE? :SYST:PRES:TYPE FACT Example Notes Supported for backwards compatibility only. It is a no-op, which does not change the behavior of any preset operation Preset Unaffected by Preset, but set to...
Page 932: Restart Instrument (Shutdown)
5 Preset 5.14 Restart Instrument (Shutdown) 5.14 Restart Instrument (Shutdown) Shuts down the instrument, then reboots it. :SYSTem:PUP Remote Command :SYST:PUP Example EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 933: Restart Application (Application Shutdown)
5 Preset 5.15 Restart Application (Application Shutdown) 5.15 Restart Application (Application Shutdown) Restarts the instrument application without rebooting the instrument. Before you send this command, make sure you have saved any trace or measurement data that you want to preserve. :SYSTem:PUP:PROCess Remote Command...
Page 934: System Log Off (Remote Command Only)
5 Preset 5.16 System Log Off (Remote Command Only) 5.16 System Log Off (Remote Command Only) Provides a means to terminate all open Windows applications, and log off the current user. This is equivalent to performing the Windows command: shutdown –l –f –t0 :SYSTem:LOFF Remote Command...
Page 935: Power Standby (Instrument Shutdown)
5 Preset 5.17 Power Standby (Instrument Shutdown) 5.17 Power Standby (Instrument Shutdown) Pressing the power switch powers down the instrument. You are warned that shutting down will cause the application to lose unsaved data, and the instrument lets you respond to this warning before shutting down. The command below has the same effect, except that you can specify Normal mode (NORMal) or Forced mode(FORCe): –...
Page 936: Input/Output
X-Series Signal Analyzers EMI Receiver Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 6 Input/Output Accesses menus that let you control the Input/Output parameters of the instrument. In general, these are functions associated with external connections to the instrument, either to the inputs or the outputs. Input/output connections tend to be based on situation-specific hardware set up.
Page 937: Rf Source
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1 RF Source Lets you control and configure the internal RF Source. This tab only appears in models that support a built-in independent RF Source, which include E7760B, and modular products such as EXM and VXT. External Source Control and built-in Tracking Sources are controlled using the Source tab in Meas Setup.
Page 938 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source When using VXT M9410A/11A/15A/16A with Remote Radio Heads (such as the Keysight M1740A mmWave Transceiver for 5G), the choices in the dropdown menu appear as: Head h RFHD p For example, if you have two Radio Heads (numbered 1 and 2), each of which have...
Page 939: Half Duplex Output Port
Selects the Gen port on M8920A/20B Selects the T/R port on M8920A/20B RRHhRFHDp Used to select a port on a Radio Head (such as the Keysight M1740A mmWave Transceiver) as an output RRHhRFHDp corresponds to Head h, port RF Tx/Rx p. For example,...
Page 940: Rf Power
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :HDUPlex:PORT:OUTPut RFIO3 Example :HDUPlex:PORT:OUTPut? Dependencies Only appears in EXM RFIO3 is selected as “Half Duplex Input Port”, then “Half Duplex Output Port” will be set to RFIO4 automatically RFIO4 is selected as “Half Duplex Input Port”, then “Half Duplex Output Port” will be set to RFIO3 automatically RFIO4...
Page 941 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Please refer to the "RF Power Range" on page 941 table below for the valid ranges. :SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <ampl> Remote Command :SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]? :SOUR:POW -100 dBm Example Notes Amplitude corrections can be specified for use with the source. In the event of amplitude corrections being applied, the valid ranges for the RF power do not change dependent on the current amplitude correction setting.
Page 942 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source VXT model M9420A RF Output Frequency Min Output Max Output Power Max Output Power Port Range Power without Option “1EA” with Option “1EA” RF Output 60 MHz ≤ f ≤ 6 –150 dBm 10 dBm 25 dBm RFHD 60 MHz ≤...
Page 943 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source VXT models M9415A/16A RF Output Frequency Min Output Max Output Power Max Output Power Port Range Power without Option “1EA” with Option “1EA” RF Output 380 MHz ≤ f ≤ –150 dBm 5 dBm 25 dBm 12.3 GHz RFHD 380 MHz ≤...
Page 944: Set Reference Power
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source M8920A/20B RF Output Frequency Min Output Max Output Power Port Range Power 100 kHz ≤ f ≤ 6 –150 dBm without option 1EA: 3 dBm with option 1EA: 15 dBm 100 kHz ≤ f ≤ 6 –150 dBm T/R port high power attenuator On: -15 T/R port high power attenuator Off: 3...
Page 945: Power Ref
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.6.3 Power Ref Lets you toggle the state of the power reference. When you use a power reference, the signal generator outputs an RF power that is set relative to the reference power by the value entered under Source>Amplitude>RF Power as follows: Output power = reference power + entered power Where: –...
Page 946: Amptd Offset
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOUR:POW:UNIT V Couplings RF Power and Power Ref units are modified by Power Unit Preset State Saved Saved in Instrument State 6.1.6.5 Amptd Offset Lets you specify the RF output power offset value. When the amplitude offset is set to zero (0) and you set a new offset value (positive or negative), the displayed amplitude value changes as follows, and the RF output power does not change: Displayed value = output power + offset value...
Page 947: Amplitude Increment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source -200.00 dB 200.00 dB 6.1.6.6 Amplitude Increment Changes the step size for the RF Power function. Once an increment size has been selected and the RF Amplitude function is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for RF Power from remote commands) change the RF Power by the set value.
Page 948: Sequencer
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Once the List Sequencer has been configured using the front panel, SCPI, or by loading a tab-delimited file, the sequence must be initiated using the front panel Initiate Sequence key, or the corresponding SCPI command. Dependencies Not available in E7760B 6.1.8.1 Sequencer...
Page 949: Repetition
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.8.3 Repetition Accesses a sub-menu to select the repetition type for the List Sequencer globally. It cannot be changed between different sequence steps. In Single, the Source list plays one time after initiation. In Continuous, the Source list plays continuously after initiation.
Page 950: Manual Trigger Now
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOURce:LIST:TRIGgerout:TYPe:Marker Backwards Compatibility SCPI 6.1.8.6 Manual Trigger Now Provides a software trigger event to the List Sequencer. During execution of a sequence, if the sequencer is halted on any step that has been configured with a “Manual”...
Page 951: Insert Step Before
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Step Count Insert Step Before Inserts a new step, with default values, before the currently selected step. Inserting a step automatically increases the Step Count parameter by 1. If a sequence has already reached the upper limit of 1000 steps, then this operation is rejected, and error -221, “Setting Conflict;...
Page 952: Transition Time
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source More Information Parameter SCPI Notes Free Run Sets the trigger input for the current step to Free Run Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Manual Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual (Trigger Key). Any step in the (Trigger Key) sequence set to Manual will cause the sequence execution to stop until the manual trigger key is pressed.
Page 953: Band
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:TRAN:TIME? Notes SCPI is supported after A.09.40 Dependencies Not available in E7760B Preset 1.0 ms 0.0 ms 4.0 ks Band Lets you select the radio band for use in the current step. :SOURce:LIST:STEP[1]|2|…|1000:SETup:RADio:BAND <band> Remote Command where <band>...
Page 954 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Standard SCPI Example PCS 1900 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND PCS1900 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND GSM450 GSM 450 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND GSM480 GSM 480 GSM/EDGE GSM 700 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND GSM700 GSM 850 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND GSM850 T-GSM 810 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND T-GSM810 US Cell CDMA 2000 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND USCELL US PCS...
Page 955 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Standard SCPI Example Band XIX W-CDMA :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BANDXIX Band 1 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND1 Band 2 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND2 Band 3 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND3 Band 4 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND4 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND5 Band 5 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND6...
Page 956 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Standard SCPI Example Band 34 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND34 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND35 Band 35 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND36 Band 36 LTE TDD Band 37 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND37 Band 38 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND38 Band 39 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND39 Band 40...
Page 957 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Standard SCPI Example N 66 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N66 N 70 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N70 N 71 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N71 N 74 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N74 N 75 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N75 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N76 N 76 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N77...
Page 958: Freq/Chan
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Dependencies Not available in E7760B DOWN Preset DOWN | UP Range Freq/Chan Lets you select the frequency or channel value for the current step. If the Band selection for the current row is NONE, you enter a frequency. Otherwise, enter a channel, which causes the frequency to be automatically selected, based on the Band selection.
Page 959: Power
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Entering a Channel If the Band selection for the current row is not NONE, enter a Channel Number. This field in the table allows you to select the channel value for the current step. The frequency is selected automatically, based on the Band.
Page 960: Waveform File
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source where <string> is one of: "CW", "waveform name", "Cont", "Off" For full details of options, see "More Information" on page 960 :SOURce:LIST:STEP[1]|2|…|1000:SETup:WAVeform? :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:WAV "CW" Example :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:WAV? Notes SCPI is supported after A.09.40 Dependencies Not available in E7760B For VXT models M9410A/11A/16A, if the Waveform is not Continue Previous, there is always a time gap between the current step and the previous step Preset...
Page 961: Duration Time
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source The duration can be set to be either the number of times for the ARB file associated with the sequence to play, or a specific time value, or continuous. If the step is set to play a CW tone, the step duration cannot be set to a play count.
Page 962: Play Count
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source When "Step Duration" on page 960 is Continuous Abort, this parameter specifies the maximum duration that the waveform will continue to play after a step trigger is received before the transition to the next waveform will occur. Duration is limited to a maximum of 20 seconds.
Page 963: Trig Out
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source when step duration type is Continuous on step #" is displayed If Play Count is set for the last step, the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after play count setting is reached Dependencies Not available in E7760B Preset...
Page 964 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source steps you have configured. For details see "Number of Steps" on page 950 If you attempt to remotely set or query a subopcode that is out of range, an error is generated Step Configuration Parameters There are 10 parameters for each step, which must be in the following order in the command: Step Trigger...
Page 965: Step Configuration Of Step Trigger Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Power Data Type: ampl <power> Specifies the output power for the step in dBm. For details of the valid ranges see "Power" on page 959 Waveform Data Type: string <waveform> Specifies the waveform for playback during the step. The step can output either a new ARB waveform, continue playback of the previous waveform, or output a CW tone.
Page 966: Step Configuration Of Transition Time Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Steps" on page 950. As a step is setup, the value entered runs through several levels of validation. :SOURce:LIST:SETup:INPut:TRIGger <enum>, <enum>, <enum>, … Remote Command :SOURce:LIST:SETup:INPut:TRIGger? :SOUR:LIST:SET:INP:TRIG IMM,INT,EXT2 Example :SOUR:LIST:SET:INP:TRIG? Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger <enum>...
Page 967: Step Configuration Of Radio Band Link Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source on page 950. As a step is set up, the value entered runs through several levels of validation. :SOURce:LIST:SETup:RADio:BAND <enum>, <enum>, <enum>, … Remote Command :SOURce:LIST:SETup:RADio:BAND? :SOUR:LIST:SET:RAD:BAND PGSM, EGSM, RGSM Example :SOUR:LIST:SET:RAD:BAND? Notes The command sets up the parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band <enum>...
Page 968: Step Configuration Of Frequency/Channel Number Parameter List
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Step Configuration of Frequency/Channel Number parameter list (Remote Command Only) Configures the Frequency or Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time. The number of arrays is same as step number defined in "Number of Steps"...
Page 969: Step Configuration Of Waveform Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Power <ampl> - specifies the output power for the step in dBm. For details of the valid ranges, see "Power" on page 959 If input parameter number exceeds the step number defined by "Number of Steps" on page 950, then error -221, "Settings conflict;...
Page 970: Step Configuration Of Step Duration Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Step Configuration of Step Duration parameter list (Remote Command Only) Configures the Step Duration parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time. The number of arrays is same as step number defined in "Number of Steps"...
Page 971: Step Configuration Of Output Trigger Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Time or Count <time/int> - specifies time duration in seconds or play count of the ARB file associated with the step If input parameter number exceeds the step number defined by "Number of Steps" on page 950, then an error is generated, and only those parameters whose index number falls within number of steps will be updated...
Page 972: Remote Software Trigger (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.8.8 Remote Software Trigger (Remote command Only) During execution of a list sequence, the sequence halts and waits at any step that has Step Trigger set to “Bus”. Sending this command triggers the step and continues the sequence.
Page 973 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source numeric keypad displays the unit terminator. :SOURce:FREQuency[:CW] <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:FREQuency[:CW]? :SOUR:FREQ 1.00 GHz Example Notes Internal source has list sequence mode, which comprises of several steps that contain separate output power, frequency and waveform etc. When the source list sequence playing is complete, the last step keeps playing, and you can use this command to change the list sequence last step’s output frequency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number, such that updates to the band...
Page 974 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source VXT models M9410A/11A RF Output Port Preset Min Without Option Min With Option “LFE” “LFE” RF Output 1 GHz 380 MHz 1 MHz 6 GHz RFHD 1 GHz 380 MHz 1 MHz 6 GHz VXT models M9415A/16A Freq Option Preset 1 GHz...
Page 975: Channel
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.9.2 Channel The frequency of the source can be specified by a channel number of a given frequency band. This control allows you to specify the current channel number. For the appropriate range of channel numbers for a given frequency band, see the following tables: "GSM/EDGE Channel Number Ranges"...
Page 976 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Link (Device) Range Frequency (MHz) 955 £ n £ 1023 935.0 + 0.2*(n-1024) GSM 450 Uplink (MS) 256 £ n £ 293 450.6 + 0.2*(n-259) Downlink (BS) 256 £ n £ 293 460.6 + 0.2*(n-259) GSM 480 Uplink (MS) 306 £...
Page 977 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Link (Device) Range Frequency (MHz) Uplink 2012 ≤n ≤2338 n÷5 + 2100 2362 ≤n ≤2687 n÷5 + 2030.1 Band VIII Downlink 2937 ≤n ≤3088 n÷5 + 340 Uplink 2712 ≤n ≤2863 n÷5 + 340 Band IX Downlink 9237 ≤n ≤9387...
Page 978 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source The relation between EARFCN and the carrier frequency in MHz for the uplink is given by the following equation where F and N are given in table 5.4.4- UL_low Offs-UL 1 and N is the uplink EARFCN. + 0.1(N –...
Page 979: Radio Setup
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source LTE TDD Channel Number Ranges The carrier frequency in the uplink and downlink is designated by the E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (EARFCN) in the range 0 - 65535. The relation between EARFCN and the carrier frequency in MHz for the downlink is given by the following equation, where F and N are given in table 5.4.4-1 and...
Page 980 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Radio Standard/Radio Band Lets you select the radio standard and associated radio band. The first column in the dialog lets you set the Radio Standard; for each standard, and the second column in the dialog changes to show you the available bands. Once you have selected the radio standard, you can then set an active channel band.
Page 981 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source PCS 1900 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND PCS1900 GSM 450 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND GSM450 GSM 480 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND GSM480 GSM 700 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND GSM700 GSM 850 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND GSM850 T-GSM 810 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND T-GSM810 W-CDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses the W-CDMA specific channel band sub-menus.
Page 982 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band 9 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND9 Band 10 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND10 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND11 Band 11 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND12 Band 12 Band 13 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND13 Band 14 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND14 Band 17 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND17 Band 18 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND18 Band 19 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND19 Band 20 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND20 Band 21...
Page 983 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band 40 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND40 Band 41 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND41 Band 42 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND42 Band 43 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND43 Band 44 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND44 Band 45 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND45 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND46 Band 46 5GNR Sets 5G NR as the radio standard for use and accesses the 5G NR specific channel band sub-menus.
Page 984: Set Reference Frequency
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source N 81 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N81 N 82 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N82 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N83 N 83 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N84 N 84 N 86 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N86 N 257 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N257 N 258 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N258 N 260 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N260 N 261 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N261 Radio Band Link Lets you specify the channel band type as either uplink or downlink link direction.
Page 985: Freq Reference
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source When you use a frequency reference, the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the reference frequency by the value entered under Source, Frequency, Frequency as follows: Output frequency = reference frequency - entered frequency Where: –...
Page 986: Freq Offset
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source For more information on Reference Frequency, see "Set Reference Frequency" on page 984. :SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence? :SOUR:FREQ:REF 0.00 Hz Example Dependencies Unavailable, and grayed-out, when List Sequencer is Couplings The frequency reference state is coupled to the frequency reference set immediate action. When the reference set immediate action key is pressed, or the SCPI command issued, it turns the frequency reference state Preset...
Page 987: Freq Increment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero (0) and you enter a new frequency value under Source, Frequency, Frequency, the displayed frequency will be the same as the value entered and the RF output frequency will be equal to the value entered minus the offset value as follows: Output frequency = entered frequency –...
Page 988: Rx/Tx Coupling
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Option 506 6.00 GHz For E7760B: Dependent on port selected For EXM, if license 5WC is present, the frequency range should be limited to: 1.1GHz-1.7GHz, 2.4GHz- 2.5GHz, 4.8GHz-6.0GHz. If the user-defined frequency is outside of range, reports error message “Settings conflict;...
Page 989: Rx/Tx Offset
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.9.9 Rx/Tx Offset Lets you offset the RF Output Frequency of the source from the Center Frequency of the instrument. See "Rx/Tx Coupling" on page 988 for coupling behavior. :SOURce:FREQuency:COUPling:OFFSet <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:FREQuency:COUPling:OFFSet? :SOUR:FREQ:COUP:OFF 100 kHz Example Dependencies Grayed-out when...
Page 990: Modulation Setup
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Preset ON|OFF Range 6.1.11 Modulation Setup Allows access to the menus for setting up the available modulation types. Not available in E7760B. AM/FM/PM are not available for VXT models M9415A/16A and M9415E/16E . 6.1.11.1 AM Enables or disables amplitude modulation.
Page 991: Am Rate Increment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOURce:AM:INTernal:FREQuency <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:AM:INTernal:FREQuency? :SOUR:AM:INT:FREQ 40.0 Hz Example Dependencies Not available in E7760B Preset 400.0 Hz 10 Hz 40 kHz 6.1.11.4 AM Rate Increment Changes the step size for "AM Rate" on page 990. Once an increment size has been UP|DOWN selected and AM Rate is active, the step keys (and the parameters for AM...
Page 992: Fm Deviation
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.11.6 FM Deviation Lets you set the frequency modulation deviation. :SOURce:FM[:DEViation] <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:FM[:DEViation]? :SOUR:FM 1.00 kHz Example Dependencies Not available in E7760B Preset 1.00 Hz 1.00 Hz 100.00 kHz 6.1.11.7 FM Rate Lets you set the internal frequency modulation rate. :SOURce:FM:INTernal:FREQuency <freq>...
Page 993: Pm Deviation
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.11.9 PM Enables or disables phase modulation. Turning PMON when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned and the generation of an error. :SOURce:PM:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :SOURce:PM:STATe? :SOUR:PM:STAT OFF...
Page 994: Pm Rate Increment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 10 Hz 40 kHz 6.1.11.12 PM Rate Increment Changes the step size for "PM Rate" on page 993. Once an increment size has been selected and PM Rate is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for PM Rate from remote commands) change PM Rate by the increment value.
Page 995: Sample Rate
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Dependencies This setting is for the independent mode, and has no effect on "List Sequencer" on page 947. If Sequencer is ON, this will make the source enter List Sequencer mode, and even if ARB state is ON, the ARB file will not be played.
Page 996 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source E7760B: 2.64 GHz All Others: 1.00 kHz Hardware Dependent: E7760B 2.64 GHz VXT model M9420A Option B40 50 MHz Option B85 100 MHz Option B1X 200 MHz VXT models M9410A/11A and M9410E/11E Option B40 50 MHz Option B3X 375 MHz Option B6X...
Page 997 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 100 kHz ~ 1 MHz (Option LFE) 50 kHz 1 MHz ~ 10 MHz (Option LFE) 500 kHz 10 MHz ~ 20 MHz (Option LFE) 5 MHz 20 MHz ~ 60 MHz (Option LFE) 10 MHz 60 MHz ~ 80 MHz (Option LFE) 20 MHz...
Page 998 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Option Maximum IF BW 40 MHz 300 MHz 600 MHz 1200 MHz Center Frequency Limitation: Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 1 MHz ~ 10 MHz (Option LFE) 500 kHz 10 MHz ~ 20 MHz (Option LFE) 5 MHz 20 MHz ~ 60 MHz (Option LFE) 10 MHz...
Page 999: Run-Time Scaling
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 330 MHz ~ 380 MHz (without Option LFE) (CF – 330 MHz) * 2 380 MHz ~ 550 MHz 100 MHz 550 MHz ~ 1310 MHz 200 MHz 1310 MHz ~ 2000 MHz 600 MHz 2000 MHz ~ 25.9 GHz 1200 MHz...
Page 1000: Baseband Power
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Preset 0.00 Hz -50.00 MHz 50.00 MHz Baseband Power Lets you quickly control the power of the modulator prior to up-conversion to the RF carrier. :SOURce:RADio:ARB:BASeband:POWer <ampl> Remote Command :SOURce:RADio:ARB:BASeband:POWer? :SOUR:RAD:ARB:BAS:POW -10 dB Example Notes The Source Power level equals RF Power plus Baseband Power.

This manual is also suitable for:

N9000b N9020b N9021b N9030b N9038b N9040b ... Show all